Ipi 6L20 PDF

Installation Planning Instructions
INSTRUCTIONS
Document ID DBAE706092-
Date of issue 9 May 2018
Installation Krasnoe 04001
Product Wärtsilä 20
Project ID SP/03342
Version a5
© Copyright by Wärtsilä Finland Oy
All rights reserved. No part of this booklet may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means (electronic,
mechanical, graphic, photocopying, recording, taping or other information retrieval systems) without the prior written
permission of the copyright owner.
THIS PUBLICATION IS DESIGNED TO PROVIDE AN ACCURATE AND AUTHORITATIVE INFORMATION WITH
REGARD TO THE SUBJECT-MATTER COVERED AS WAS AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. HOWEVER,THE
PUBLICATION DEALS WITH COMPLICATED TECHNICAL MATTERS SUITED ONLY FOR SPECIALISTS IN THE
AREA, AND THE DESIGN OF THE SUBJECT-PRODUCTS IS SUBJECT TO REGULAR IMPROVEMENTS,
MODIFICATIONS AND CHANGES. CONSEQUENTLY, THE PUBLISHER AND COPYRIGHT OWNER OF THIS
PUBLICATION CAN NOT ACCEPT ANY RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY EVENTUAL ERRORS OR
OMISSIONS IN THIS BOOKLET OR FOR DISCREPANCIES ARISING FROM THE FEATURES OF ANY ACTUAL ITEM
IN THE RESPECTIVE PRODUCT BEING DIFFERENT FROM THOSE SHOWN IN THIS PUBLICATION. THE PUBLISHER
AND COPYRIGHT OWNER SHALL UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY FINANCIAL
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR OTHER LOSS, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGE OR INJURY, SUFFERED BY ANY
PARTY MAKING USE OF THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.
Installation Planning Instructions Preface
Preface
Wärtsilä as supplier and the yard as contractor need to communicate installation specific
information to build an installation that is both reliable and economical in use. During the years
this information has evolved into what we today are calling the Installation Planning Instruction
(IPI).
Instructions included in this file are installation specific and based on the best of our experience
and knowledge. The instructions shall be used as a recommendation with general guidelines.
However, project specific deviations can be accepted based on special consideration.
Alternative solutions and design should be separately agreed with Wärtsilä.
The level of content maintained in the IPI is based on the assumption that the receiving
contractor maintains the workmanship required to design and build high quality ship
installations.
The IPI is a living document that is updated according to the proceeding project and as far as
technically possible reflect the actual situation. Each updated issue of the IPI is identified by
its own unique version number ( e.g. "project xx" - a1) which should be referred to in any
correspondence or discussion related to the specific projects.
Issuing the first or any new version of IPI is proceeded by our internal quality assurance and
approval by the Project Manager. To ensure further development in our common interest we
appreciate your comments forwarded to us via the Project Manager.
Wärtsilä, Marine Solutions
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 iii

Version History
Version Date History
a5 2018-05-09
a4 2018-03-09
a3 2018-02-19
a2 2018-02-19
a1 2017-12-22
List of Changes
List of updated text in this version
See section Page
1.5 Information in section "Wärtsilä scope of supply for project Krasnoe 04001" has 1-4
been updated.
8.4.4 Information in section "Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor (5R02)" has been 8-6
updated.
List of updated drawings in this version

Drawing number Updates Page
DBAE712991 a Engine modbus list revised from - to a 10-24
DBAE853716 - Preheater electrical diagram new 6-14
DBAE821779 - Installation instruction of resiliently mounted Wärtsilä new 2-35
20/20DF main engine
DBAE706077 b Horizontal silencer 3E12224B revised from a to b 8-10
DAAF413442 - Connection flywheel / flexible coupling new 2-73
toBeAdded Propulsion arrangement drawing removed -
v69L1638 c Installation instruction of resiliently mounted on steel removed -
chocks
iv Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions Table of contents
Table of contents
1. Project Information ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Project administration ................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Project technical data ................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2.1 Ambient conditions ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.2 Fuel oil specification ...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.3 Classification ................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.4 Electric power supply .................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.5 Painting ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.6 Factory acceptance test ................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Documents in this project .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1 Comments to this document ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.2 Shipyard drawings ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 Arrival inspection ....................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4.1 Responsibilities ............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4.2 Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4.3 Instructions to be followed in case of loss or damages ............................................... 1-3
1.5 Wärtsilä scope of supply for project Krasnoe 04001 ................................................................ 1-4
1.6 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
2. Main Engine ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 About the main engine ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Recommendations for operation ................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2.1 Starting and stopping ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2.2 Recommendations for idling and low load operation ..................................... 2-1
2.1.2.3 Engine operating range ................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2.4 Restrictions for operation at low air temperature ........................................... 2-2
2.2 Technical information ................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.1 Technical specification .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.2 Technical data ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Design of the engine room ........................................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.1 Engine room arrangement ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Vibrations ....................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.2.1 External forces and couple ............................................................................. 2-6
2.3.2.2 Torque variations ............................................................................................. 2-6
2.3.3 Noise levels ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4 Installation of the engine ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.4.1 Lifting the engine ........................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Installation procedure .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5 Commissioning responsibility matrix ......................................................................................... 2-9
2.6 Component data, Wärtsilä scope of supply .............................................................................. 2-11
2.6.1 Flexible mounting .......................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6.2 Flexible pipe connections (6H01) .................................................................................. 2-11
2.6.3 Spare set of flexible pipe connections (6H01) ............................................................... 2-12
2.6.4 Power transmission ....................................................................................................... 2-12
2.6.5 Packing and transportation ........................................................................................... 2-12
2.6.6 0Y02 - Tools (engine) ..................................................................................................... 2-12
2.6.7 0Y04 - Spare parts (engine) .......................................................................................... 2-21
2.6.8 Technical documentation .............................................................................................. 2-27
2.6.9 Start-up support ............................................................................................................ 2-27
2.7 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 2-27
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 v

Table of contents Installation Planning Instructions
3. Fuel Oil System .................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Engine internal system .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 System design data ................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Fuel oil quality ............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 Fuel oil heating .............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3 Design considerations ................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.4 Calculation formulas ...................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3 Recommended functions .......................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.1 HFO separator unit (1N02) ............................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.1.1 General remarks .............................................................................................. 3-6
3.3.1.2 Settling of heavy fuel ....................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1.3 Separator system ............................................................................................ 3-7
3.3.1.4 Mode of operation ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1.5 Separator feed pump (1P02) ........................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1.6 Separator heater (1E01) .................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.1.7 Separator (1S01) ............................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.1.8 Sludge tank (1T05) .......................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.2 HFO day tank (1T03) ..................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.3 Feeder/booster unit (1N01) ........................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3.1 Fuel feed pump (1P04) .................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3.2 Automatic filter (1F08) ..................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3.3 De-aeration tank (1T08) .................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.3.4 Circulation pump (1P06) ................................................................................ 3-10
3.3.3.5 Heater (1E02) .................................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.3.6 Viscosity meter (1I02) ...................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.3.7 Flow meter (1I01) ............................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.4 HFO safety filter (1F03) .................................................................................................. 3-11
3.3.5 Collection leak fuel ........................................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.5.1 Leak fuel tank, clean fuel (1T04) ..................................................................... 3-11
3.3.5.2 Leak fuel tank, dirty fuel (1T07) ....................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6 Supply of MDF .............................................................................................................. 3-11
3.3.6.1 MDF Suction strainer (1F07) ........................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6.2 MDF circulation pump (1P03) ......................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6.3 MDF pressure control valve (1V02) ................................................................. 3-12
3.3.6.4 MDF day tank (1T06) ....................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.1 Pressure control valve (HFO) (1V04) .............................................................................. 3-12
3.4.2 Overflow valve (HFO/MDO) (1V05) ................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.3 Safety filter (HFO) (1F03) ............................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.4 Suction strainer (MDF) (1F07) ........................................................................................ 3-13
3.4.5 Circulation pump (MDO) (1P03) .................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.6 Fine filter (MDO) (1F05) .................................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.7 Pressure control valve (MDO) (1V02) ............................................................................. 3-14
3.4.8 Cooler (HFO/MDO) (1E04) ............................................................................................. 3-14
3.5 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 3-15
4. Lubricating Oil and Crankcase Ventilation Systems ...................................................................... 4-1

4.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Lubricating oil quality .................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1.1 Validated lubricating oils for the engine .......................................................... 4-2
4.2.1.2 Approved lubricating oils for governor ........................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.3 Approved lubricating grease for starting motor .............................................. 4-6
4.3.1 Lubricating oil system ................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1.1 Separator unit (2N01) ...................................................................................... 4-6
vi Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

4.3.1.2 Renovating oil tank (2T04) .............................................................................. 4-7

4.3.1.3 Renovated oil tank (2T05) ............................................................................... 4-7
4.3.1.4 New oil tank (2T03) ......................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.1.5 Stand-by (2P04) .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.1.6 Sludge/waste oil tank (2T06) ........................................................................... 4-7
4.3.2 Crankcase ventilation system ....................................................................................... 4-7
4.4 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 4-8
5. Compressed Air System .................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Starting air consumption ............................................................................................... 5-1
5.3.1 Starting air compressor unit (3N02) .............................................................................. 5-1
5.3.1.1 Separator (3S01) ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.4.1 Starting air vessel (3T01) ............................................................................................... 5-2
5.4.2 Starting air vessel Aux .................................................................................................. 5-2
5.4.3 Air filter (starting air inlet) (3F02) .................................................................................... 5-3
5.5 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
6. Cooling Water System ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1 Raw water quality .......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.2 Cooling water treatment ................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2.1 Glycol .............................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.1 Central cooler (4E08) ..................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Expansion tank (4T05) ................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3 Drain tank (4T04) ........................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.4 Air venting and air separator (4S01) .............................................................................. 6-5
6.3.5 Orifices .......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.1 Temperature control valve (heat recovery) (4V02) ......................................................... 6-6
6.4.2 Preheating unit (4N01) ................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.3 Temperature control valve (box cooler) (4V14) .............................................................. 6-6
6.5 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 6-7
7. Combustion Air System ..................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 Combustion air quality .................................................................................................. 7-1
7.3.1 Engine room ventilation ................................................................................................. 7-1
7.3.2 Combustion air for engines ........................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.3 Condensation of charge air coolers .............................................................................. 7-4
8. Exhaust Gas System .......................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Recommendations and design data ......................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.1 Exhaust gas piping ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2.2 Sampling port for gaseous emissions ........................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Supporting ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.4 Back pressure ............................................................................................................... 8-2
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 vii

8.2.5 Exhaust gas bellows (5H01) .......................................................................................... 8-3

8.2.6 Selective Catalytic Reduction (11N03) .......................................................................... 8-3
8.2.7 Exhaust gas silencer (5R02) .......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.8 Exhaust gas boiler ......................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Installation instructions .............................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3.1 Exhaust gas bellow (5H01) ............................................................................................ 8-3
8.3.2 Charge air wastegate connection ................................................................................. 8-6
8.4.1 Turbocharger cleaning device (5Z03) ............................................................................ 8-6
8.4.2 Connection piece (5Z01) ............................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.3 Exhaust gas bellows (5H01) .......................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.4 Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor (5R02) ........................................................... 8-6
8.5 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 8-7
9. Piping Arrangements ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Pipe dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Trace heating ............................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3 Pressure class ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4 Pipe class .................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.5 Insulation ................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.6 Local gauges ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.7 Cleaning procedures ................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.7.1 Cleanliness during pipe installation .............................................................................. 9-4
9.7.2 Pickling .......................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.8 Flexible pipe connections .......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.9 Installing flexible pipe connections ........................................................................................... 9-6
9.9.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.9.2 Pipe supporting ............................................................................................................. 9-6
9.9.2.1 Fixed supports ................................................................................................ 9-6
9.9.2.2 Sliding supports .............................................................................................. 9-7
9.9.3 Fuel pipes ...................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.9.4 Omega pipes ................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.9.5 Pipe support nearby the diesel engine .......................................................................... 9-8
9.10 Cleaning and flushing instructions ............................................................................................ 9-10
9.10.1 Fuel oil pipes ................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.10.2 Lubricating oil pipes ...................................................................................................... 9-11
9.10.2.1 Piping and equipment built on the engine ...................................................... 9-11
9.10.2.2 External lubricating oil system ........................................................................ 9-11
9.10.2.3 Type of flushing oil .......................................................................................... 9-12
10. Automation System ........................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 System overview ....................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Internal el & automation system .................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1.1 Local controls & indications ............................................................................ 10-2
10.2 Control signals ........................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Output signals ............................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.1 IS 872 Engine ready for start .......................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.2 IB 726 Remote control indication ................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.3 IS 181 Speed switch 1 (Engine running) ......................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.4 IS 190 Ready to clutch .................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.5 IS 875 Start failure indication .......................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.6 OS 7315 Loadreduction request ..................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.7 IS 7323 Shutdown prewarning ....................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1.8 IS 7603 Stop / shutdown status 2 .................................................................. 10-4
10.2.1.9 IS 166 Engine overload ................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.1.10 NS 881 Engine control system minor alarm ................................................... 10-5
10.2.1.11 NS 886 Engine control system major failure ................................................... 10-5
10.2.1.12 IB 7324 Engine shutdown status .................................................................... 10-5
viii Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10.2.1.13 NS 885 Common engine alarm ....................................................................... 10-5

10.2.1.14 OS 441 Pre-lubrication pump control / Pre-heater control ............................. 10-5
10.2.1.15 CV 223 Pre-lubrication pump control / Pre-heater control ............................. 10-5
10.2.1.16 CV 210 Lube oil stand-by pump start ............................................................. 10-6
10.2.1.17 CV 410 HT jacket water stand-by pump start ................................................ 10-6
10.2.1.18 CV 460 LT water stand-by pump start ............................................................ 10-6
10.2.1.19 SI 196 Engine speed ....................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.1.20 SI 518 TC A speed .......................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.1.21 CT 7001 Engine load ....................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.2 Input signals .................................................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.2.1 OS 7302 Remote start .................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.2.2 OS 7304 Remote stop .................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.2.3 OS 7312 External start blocking 1 .................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2.4 OS 7313 External start blocking 2 .................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2.5 OS 7309 External shutdown 1 ........................................................................ 10-7
10.2.2.6 OS 7311 External shutdown 3 ........................................................................ 10-7
10.2.2.7 OS 7305 External shutdown 4 (Emergency stop) ........................................... 10-7
10.2.2.8 OS 7308 Remote shutdown reset ................................................................... 10-7
10.2.2.9 OS 7306 Stop / shutdown override ................................................................ 10-7
10.2.2.10 GS 7600 Clutch status .................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.2.11 OS 7601 Clutch in request .............................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2.12 OT 190 Analogue speed reference ................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2.13 OS 7325 Analogue speed ref. select .............................................................. 10-8
10.2.2.14 OS 7326 Fixed speed select ........................................................................... 10-8
10.2.2.15 OS 7329 Isochronous loadsharing enable ...................................................... 10-8
10.3 Bus communication ................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Functional description of start/stop .......................................................................................... 10-8
10.4.1 Start function ................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.4.2 Stop and shutdown function ......................................................................................... 10-8
10.5 Speed control functions & loadsharing ..................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.1.2 Dynamics ........................................................................................................ 10-9
10.5.1.3 Limiters ........................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.1.4 Control modes ................................................................................................ 10-9
10.5.2 CB open control mode .................................................................................................. 10-10
10.5.2.1 Engine start ..................................................................................................... 10-10
10.5.2.2 Running at no load .......................................................................................... 10-10
10.5.3 Speed droop control and load sharing mode ............................................................... 10-10
10.5.3.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 10-10
10.5.4 Isochronous control and load sharing ........................................................................... 10-11
10.5.4.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 10-11
10.6 Power unit .................................................................................................................................. 10-11
10.7 Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 10-11
10.8.1 Power Unit (9N36) ......................................................................................................... 10-12
10.8.2 Engine control panel for the bridge (IP22) (8N09) ......................................................... 10-12
10.8.3 Engine control panel for a wing on the bridge (IP22) .................................................... 10-12
10.8.4 Pressure indicator box .................................................................................................. 10-12
10.8.5 Starter for engine pre lubricating oil pump (9N03) ........................................................ 10-12
10.8.6 Motor starter (Circulating pump MDO) (9N28) .............................................................. 10-13
10.8.7 Engine revolution indicator box ..................................................................................... 10-13
10.9 List of Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 10-13
11. ANNEX ................................................................................................................................................. 11-1

11.1 Unit conversion tables ............................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Prefix ............................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.2 Abbreviations ............................................................................................................................. 11-2
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 ix

11.3 Collection of drawing symbols used in drawings ...................................................................... 11-6
x Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions List of tables
List of tables
1-1 ISO-F-RMG 700 ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
2-1 External forces ........................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-2 External couples ........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2-3 Torque variations at 100% load ................................................................................................. 2-6
2-4 Torque variations at 0 % load .................................................................................................... 2-7
2-5 Wärtsilä 6L20 ............................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-6 Tools for engine automation ...................................................................................................... 2-12
2-7 Tools for main bearings ............................................................................................................. 2-13
2-8 Tool for camshaft ....................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-9 Tools for cylinder liner ................................................................................................................ 2-13
2-10 Tools for pistons ........................................................................................................................ 2-14
2-11 Tools for connecting rod ............................................................................................................ 2-15
2-12 Tools for hydraulic tightening tool for main bearing, connecting rod and cylinder head .......... 2-15
2-13 Tools for cylinder head .............................................................................................................. 2-16
2-14 Tools for for injection equipment ............................................................................................... 2-17
2-15 Miscellaneous tools ................................................................................................................... 2-19
2-16 Tools for turbocharger ............................................................................................................... 2-20
2-17 Spare parts for main bearings ................................................................................................... 2-21
2-18 Spare parts for cylinder liner ..................................................................................................... 2-21
2-19 Spare parts ................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2-20 Spare parts for cylinder valves .................................................................................................. 2-23
2-21 Spare parts for connecting rod .................................................................................................. 2-24
2-22 Spare parts for pistons .............................................................................................................. 2-25
2-23 Spare parts for piston rings ....................................................................................................... 2-25
2-24 Spare part fuel injection pump .................................................................................................. 2-26
2-25 Spare parts for fuel injection piping ........................................................................................... 2-26
2-26 Spare parts, gaskets .................................................................................................................. 2-26
2-27 Spare parts for monitoring system ............................................................................................ 2-26
3-1 MDF specifications .................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2 HFO specifications .................................................................................................................... 3-3
4-1 Fuel standards and lubricating oil requirements. ...................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Validated lubricating oils for fuel oil categories A, B and F ....................................................... 4-3
4-3 Validated lubricating oils for fuel category C. ............................................................................ 4-3
4-4 Validated lubricating oils for fuel category A, B and C. ............................................................. 4-5
4-5 Approved lubricating grease for starting motor. ........................................................................ 4-6
6-1 Raw water specification ............................................................................................................ 6-1
6-2 Approved cooling water treatment products ............................................................................. 6-2
6-3 Dosage instructions ................................................................................................................... 6-3
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 xi

List of tables Installation Planning Instructions
6-4 Minimum diameter of balance pipe ........................................................................................... 6-5

9-1 Recommended maximum velocities on pump delivery side for guidance ................................ 9-2
9-2 Classes of piping systems as per DNV rules ............................................................................. 9-3
9-3 Pipe cleaning ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
11-1 Length conversion factors ......................................................................................................... 11-1
11-2 Mass conversion factors ........................................................................................................... 11-1
11-3 Pressure conversion factors ...................................................................................................... 11-1
11-4 Volume conversion factors ........................................................................................................ 11-1
11-5 Power conversion factors .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11-6 Moment of inertia and torque conversion factors ..................................................................... 11-1
11-7 Fuel consumption conversion factors ....................................................................................... 11-1
11-8 Flow conversion factors ............................................................................................................ 11-1
11-9 Temperature conversion factors ................................................................................................ 11-2
11-10 Density conversion factors ........................................................................................................ 11-2
11-11 The most common prefix multipliers ......................................................................................... 11-2
11-12 List of symbols (DAAE000806c) ................................................................................................ 11-6
xii Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions List of figures
List of figures
2-1 In-line engine definitions ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2-2 Coordinate system .................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-3 Sound power level for engine noise, W 6L20 ............................................................................ 2-7
2-4 Sound power level for exhaust noise, W 6L20 .......................................................................... 2-8
2-5 Lifting the engine ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
3-1 Fuel oil viscosity-temperature diagram ..................................................................................... 3-5
4-1 Recommended condensate trap design (DAAF369903) ........................................................... 4-8
7-1 Engine room ventilation, turbocharger with air filter. ................................................................. 7-1
7-2 Condensation in charge air coolers ........................................................................................... 7-4
8-1 Exhaust gas back pressure measurement ................................................................................ 8-3
8-2 Overview of the exhaust gas pipe installation. .......................................................................... 8-4
8-3 Installation tolerances for exhaust gas bellows ......................................................................... 8-5
9-1 Flexible hoses ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
9-2 Typical supports after bellows. .................................................................................................. 9-8
9-3 The supports after flexible bellows. ........................................................................................... 9-9
9-4 Flushing of lubricating oil pipes ................................................................................................. 9-11
10-1 System overall architecture ....................................................................................................... 10-1
10-2 Local controls and indications ................................................................................................... 10-3
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 xiii

List of Drawings Installation Planning Instructions
List of Drawings
tobeadded Order technical specification ................................................................................... 1-6
DBAA042536 e Damage report form ................................................................................................. 1-7
DBAB317120 b Maintenance during storage .................................................................................... 1-8
DAAF405331 a Main engine drawing, W 6L20 ................................................................................. 2-29
V69C0276 - Engine room arrangement ....................................................................................... 2-30
V69C0301 C Service space requirements .................................................................................... 2-31
DAAF007340 - Operating field .......................................................................................................... 2-32
DAAF408870 - Installation of resiliently mounted Wärtsilä 20 engines ............................................ 2-33
DAAE003263 A Recommended foundation design .......................................................................... 2-34
DBAE821779 - Installation instruction of resiliently mounted Wärtsilä 20/20DF main engine ......... 2-35
V69L0245 B Alignment instructions for Wärtsilä 20 main engines ............................................... 2-61
WV98V036GB Measurement record, crankshaft alignment ............................................................ 2-69
WV98V041GB Measurement record, alignment of flexible coupling ............................................... 2-70
DAAF413442 - Connection flywheel / flexible coupling ................................................................... 2-73
DAAE002458 B Factory acceptance test .......................................................................................... 2-74
v35a0719 c Flexible pipe connection [OD18] .............................................................................. 2-84
DAAB761464 a Flexible pipe connection [OD18] .............................................................................. 2-85
DAAB761465 b Flexible pipe connection [OD22] .............................................................................. 2-86
DAAB761722 c Flexible pipe connection [DN100/PN16] .................................................................. 2-87
DAAB761717 c Flexible pipe connection [DN80/PN16] .................................................................... 2-88
DAAB745542 c Flexible pipe connection [DN32/PN40] .................................................................... 2-89
DAAB761473 a Flexible pipe connection [OD28] .............................................................................. 2-90
DAAB761658 d Flexible pipe connection [DN65/PN16] .................................................................... 2-91
DAAB761457 c Flexible pipe connection [OD12] .............................................................................. 2-92
DAAB761661 b Flexible pipe connection [DN80/PN16] .................................................................... 2-93
DAAB740719 a Flexible pipe connection [DN65/PN16] .................................................................... 2-94
DAAF403286 - Internal fuel oil system ............................................................................................. 3-16
DAAF403287 - Recommended fuel oil system ................................................................................ 3-17
V76F6626 F Recommended transfer and separating system ...................................................... 3-18
Z102281 - 1F03 - Safety filter (HFO), dimensional drawing ...................................................... 3-19
Z45550 - 1F03 - Safety filter (HFO), electrical drawing ........................................................... 3-20
DN32 z102345 1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF), dimensional drawing ............................................... 3-21
Z45550 1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF), electrical drawing ................................................... 3-22
Z102272 1F05 - Fine filter (MDO), dimensional drawing ........................................................ 3-23
4V17L0364 - 1V02 - Pressure control valve (MDO), dimensional drawing ................................... 3-24
Z45550 1F05 - Fine filter (MDO), electrical drawing ............................................................. 3-26
KS10-BCV-413B - 1E04 - Cooler (HFO/MDO), dimensional drawing .................................................... 3-27
daaf068591 - 1V04 - Pressure control valve (HFO), dimensional drawing .................................... 3-28
SPV-E a 1V02/04/05 - control valve , installation instruction ................................................. 3-29
4V17L0364 - 1V05 - Overflow valve (HFO/MDO), dimensional drawing ....................................... 3-34
DBAE726400 - 1P03 - Circulation pump (MDO) ............................................................................... 3-36
DAAF403288 a Internal lubricating oil system .................................................................................. 4-9
DAAF403289 a Recommended lubricating oil system ..................................................................... 4-10
DAAF403290 - Internal starting air system ....................................................................................... 5-4
DAAF403291 - Recommended starting air system .......................................................................... 5-5
DBAE503933 - 3T01 - Starting air vessel, dimensional drawing ...................................................... 5-6
Ag_0976-1-0 - 3T01 - Starting air vessel aux, dimensional drawing ............................................... 5-7
DAAF403292 a Internal cooling water system .................................................................................. 6-8
DAAF403293 - Recommended cooling water system ..................................................................... 6-9
V60D0343 - Recommended cooling water circuit deaerator ....................................................... 6-10
dbae452226 - 4V14 - Temperature control valve (box cooler), dimensional drawing ..................... 6-11
dbae452225 - 4V02- Temperature control valve (heat recovery), dimensional drawing ................. 6-12
33967_KVE8W-27 - Preheater 4609-WR-V 27kW .................................................................................... 6-13
DBAE853716 - Preheater electrical diagram .................................................................................... 6-14
DAAF403295 - Internal charge air and exhaust gas system ............................................................ 8-8
3ES2404-3B 5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor, dimensional drawing .................. 8-9
DBAE706077 b Horizontal silencer 3E12224B .................................................................................. 8-10
xiv Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions List of Drawings
4ES0061 5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor, installation instruction ................ 8-11
3V37L0587 a 5Z03 - Turbocharger cleaning device, dimensional drawing ................................... 8-17
3V60A4898 - 5Z01 - Connection piece, dimensional drawing ...................................................... 8-18
DAAB761847 e 5H01 - Exhaust gas bellows, dimensional drawing ................................................. 8-19
DBAE705678 a Block- / Interconnection diagram ............................................................................ 10-14
DBAE712991 a Engine modbus list .................................................................................................. 10-24
DBAE705679 a Power unit ................................................................................................................ 10-29
DBAE705681 - Bridge control panel ................................................................................................. 10-35
DBAE705683 - Wing control panel ................................................................................................... 10-38
DAAF025194 - Indicator Box ............................................................................................................ 10-40
DBAE705685 a Prelube pump starter ............................................................................................... 10-42
DBAE705687 b MDF Circulating pump starter .................................................................................. 10-46
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 xv

This page intentionally left blank
Installation Planning Instructions 1. Project Information
1. Project Information
1.1 Project administration

Wärtsilä internal order number: SP/03342
Wärtsilä project name: Krasnoe 04001
Wärtsilä project organisation:
Project manager Leif Rönn
Project engineer: Jonas Skoglund
Mo- +358505451359
bile:
E-mail: jonas.skoglund@wartsila.com
Mechanical design engineer: to be added by PE
Electrical design engineer: Anders Bäckström
Field service manager: to be added by PE
1.2 Project technical data

1.2.1 Ambient conditions
The equipment is designed for the following conditions:
Maximum ambient air temperature 45 °C
Minimum inlet air temperature to engine 15 °C
Maximum LT cooling water temperature before 38 °C

engine
Maximum sea water temperature 32 °C
Relative humidity 60 %
1.2.2 Fuel oil specification

This installation is designed for HFO operation according to ('ISO8217:2010')(E) with the
viscosity of max. 700.0 cSt at 50°C.
Table 1-1 ISO-F-RMG 700
Property Limit Unit
Density at 15°C, max. 991 kg/m3
Viscosity at 50°C, max. 700 cSt
Flash point, min 60 °C
Pour point (upper):

- winter quality, max 30 °C
- summer quality, max 30 °C
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-1

1. Project Information Installation Planning Instructions
Property Limit Unit
Carbon residue, micro method, max. 18 % mass
Ash, max. 0.1 % mass
Water, max. 0.5 % mass
Sulphur, max. Statutory % mass

requirements
Vanadium, max. 350 mg/kg
Total sediment aged. max. 0.1 % mass
Aluminium + silicon, max. 60 mg/kg
More detailed fuel oil requirements are specified in chapter "Fuel Oil System".
1.2.3 Classification
The equipment meets the requirements of RS for unrestricted service at the date of order.
1.2.4 Electric power supply

If not specially mentioned, all electrical equipment delivered with the engine is designed to
operate with:
Main voltage (V) ............................ 3 x 400
Frequency (Hz) .............................. 50
Control voltage (VDC) ................... 24
1.2.5 Painting
The engine(s) will be painted with factory standard colour RAL 5019 Capri Blue.
1.2.6 Factory acceptance test

A description of the procedure during factory acceptance test is enclosed in document "Factory
acceptance test".
1.3 Documents in this project

1.3.1 Comments to this document
Any comments to the material enclosed in this IPI-file have to be sent within one (1) month
after receipt, if not stated differently in contract.
1.3.2 Shipyard drawings

The following drawings are subject to review and should be forwarded as soon as available
in 2 copies, one of which will be returned with comments:
● Fuel oil piping diagram, including fuel treatment system and piping
● Lubricating oil piping diagram, including separating system
● Cooling water piping diagram, fresh and sea-water
● Starting air piping diagram
1-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

● Charge air and exhaust gas piping diagram showing the entire length of the pipes and
details of the pipe supports
● Main engine foundation
● Crankcase vent piping diagram
1.4 Arrival inspection

The purpose of this section is to give instructions and requirements for arrival inspection and
for reporting the events of any abnormalities like losses and damages. The Wärtsilä Customer
/ Buyer or their representative (=receiver) at the shipyard shall inspect the
goods/products/material shipped to the shipyard. An early detection of possible abnormalities
like damages helps preventing delays to the overall project schedule.
1.4.1 Responsibilities
The receiver at the shipyard is responsible for the inspection of the shipment to ascertain that
all items are in good condition and that the shipment is complete without missing items.
The receiver is also responsible for immediate reporting of damages, as described later on,
to Wärtsilä Project Manager and informing the transport company and the corresponding
insurance company if the transport is not arranged by Wärtsilä.
1.4.2 Inspection
The inspection must be carried out at the earliest opportunity to ensure that damages or
material shortages can be specified to avoid delays during installation or commissioning phase
of the project.
Before opening the packing cases, special attention shall be taken to ensure that the storage
location must be such that it gives protection against rain, dust, direct sunlight, theft, vandalism,
etc. The damages or losses due to these reasons are not covered by Wärtsilä.
Material received shall be inspected for:
● transport damages
● water accumulation, moisture
● equivalence with specified types as stated in the packing lists
● quantity (comparison with the packing lists, ordered quantity and the actual contents
delivered)
NOTE
When the packing case is opened, take care of adequate and tight closing, because
most of packages are protected by shelf acting volatile corrosion inhibitor VCI.
If the goods are stored over three months before usage, condition checking and required
actions must be performed according to the product specific instructions (especially engine,
turbocharger).
1.4.3 Instructions to be followed in case of loss or damages

In the event of loss or damage the receiver must give immediate notice to their own insurance
company if the transport is not arranged by Wärtsilä.
The receiver is requested to fill out the attached Wärtsilä Damage Report form accurately and
sends it with enclosures to Wärtsilä Project Manager as soon as the damages or defects are
found. Photographs taken of the damages will help in handling claims with the sub suppliers
and / or the insurance company.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-3

If the loss or damage is apparent at the time of receiving the delivery, Wärtsilä representative,
ship owners, other carriers, forwarding agents, customs and port authorities must be requested
to attend a joint survey, asked to certify the loss or damage and held liable in the form of
written notice of loss by the receiver.
If the loss or damage was not apparent at the time of receiving the delivery, the receiver fills
the Damage Report form within stipulated time.
Sea transport at the latest 3 days after receipt
Road transport at the latest 7 days after receipt
Air transport at the latest 14 days after receipt
Rail transport at the latest 7 days after receipt
NOTE
The claims made after the time limits mentioned above are not taken into account;
all corrections made will be invoiced to the Buyer.
1.5 Wärtsilä scope of supply for project Krasnoe 04001

Below is the scope of supply listed for this installation. More details about the scope are found
in each system chapter.
Description Qty/Set
W20 - Wärtsilä 6L20 2
1V04 - Pressure control valve (HFO) 1 SPVF25C2F1A12
1V05 - Overflow valve (HFO/MDO) 1 SPVF25C2F1A12
1F03 - Safety filter (HFO) 1 2.04.5.6
1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF) 1 2.04.5
1P03 - Circulation pump (MDO) 1 BT-HM32D4
1F05 - Fine filter (MDO) 1 2.04.5
1V02 - Pressure control valve (MDO) 1 SPVF25C2F1A12
1E04 - Cooler (HFO/MDO) 2 KS10-BCV-413B L900
3T01 - Starting air vessel 2 600 L / DN50
3T01 - Starting air vessel for aux 1 500L
3F02 - Air filter (starting air inlet) 2
4V02 - Temperature control valve (heat recov- 1 AKO 226G0121-100-074

ery)
4N01 - Preheating unit 1
4V14 - Temperature control valve (box cooler) 1 AKO 226G0121-125-029
5Z03 - Turbocharger cleaning device 1 Dosing unit
5Z01 - Connection piece 1 Adapter piece
5H01 - Exhaust gas bellows 2 Double
5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark ar- 1 MS-PAEXG-WSA NS 400 35dB(A)
restor
1-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Description Qty/Set
5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark ar- 1 MS-CCPAEXGH-WSA N400 35dB(A)
restor
5H01 - Spare Exhaust gas bellows 1
9N36 - Power Unit 2
8N09 - Engine control panel for the bridge 2

(IP22)
8N09 - Engine control panel for a wing on the 2
bridge (IP22)
3I01 - Pressure indicator of starting air 2
8N03 - Engine revolution indicator 2
9N03 - Starter for engine pre lubricating oil 2

pump
9N28 - Motor starter (Circulating pump MDO) 1
6H01 - Flexible pipe connections spare set 1
6B04 - Set of foundation bolts 1 M20x150 32pcs
6Z01 - Flexible mounts (engine) 2
6H01 - Flexible pipe connections 2
7C01 - Flexible coupling (flywheel) 2
7B01 - Flexible coupling fitting materials 2
0Y02 - Tools (engine) 1
0Y04 - Spare parts (engine) 1
0Z12 - VCI-coating 2
0Z11 - Tarpaulin 2
0Y08 - Transport foundation 2
0Y01 - Lifting tool set 1
0J10 - Engine manuals 2
0J21 - Inventory of Hazardous Materials (IHM) 1
0J26 - Online Services 1
0J28 - Commissioning planning and verifica- 1

tion
0J32 - Engine performance and sea trial par- 1
ticipation
1.6 List of Drawings

tobeadded Order technical specification ..................................................... 1-6
DBAA042536 e Damage report form ................................................................... 1-7
DBAB317120 b Maintenance during storage ...................................................... 1-8
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-5

1-6
Th
e
tobeadded - Order technical specification
dr
aw
in
g
wi
ll be
up
da
te
d
This drawing is the property of Wärtsilä Finland Oy and shall not be copied, shown or communicated to a third party without the consent of the owner.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DBAA042536 e - Damage report form
Arrival Inspection Damage Report
Wärtsilä Marine Solutions
Form Doc ID: DBAA042536
General information
Name of installation: Project number:
(Yard + NB no.) (Wärtsilä ID)
Shipment concerned:
Type of Equipment: Case no(s):
Damage Report
number:
Reported by:
Description of damage
Probable cause
Witness statement and contact information
Use block letters for filling this form
Actions taken
Damage photographed Yes No N/A Photographs enclosed Yes No
Insurance claim submitted Yes No N/A Claim enclosed Yes No
Separate report submitted Yes No N/A Report enclosed Yes No
Inspection performed by: Date: Verified by (Wärtsilä) : Date:
________________________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________________
(Signature) (Signature)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-7

DBAB317120 b - Maintenance during storage

M AI N T EN AN CE DU RI N G ST ORAGE

Document ID DBAB317120

Installation

Engine type 4-stroke engines

Engine number

Project

This manual is intended for the personal use of engine operators
and should always be at their disposal. The content of this manual
shall neither be copied nor communicated to a third person.

Wärtsila Finland Oy
Vaasa Factory
Tarhaajantie 2, FIN-65101 Vaasa, Finland
Tel. +358 10 709 0000, Tlx 74251 wva sf
Fax (Service) +358 6 356 7355
Fax (Spare Parts) +358 10 709 1380
1-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


© Copyright by Wärtsilä Finland Oy

All rights reserved. No part of this booklet may be reproduced or copied in any form or by
any means (electronic, mechanical, graphic, photocopying, recording, taping or other
information retrieval systems) without the prior written permission of the copyright owner.

THISPUBLICATIONISDESIGNEDTOPROVIDEANACCURATEANDAUTHORITATIVE
INFORMATIONWITHREGARDTOTHESUBJECT-MATTERCOVEREDASWAS AVAILABLEAT
THETIMEOFPRINTING.HOWEVER,THEPUBLICATIONDEALSWITH COMPLICATED
TECHNICALMATTERSSUITEDONLYFORSPECIALISTSINTHEAREA, ANDTHEDESIGNOF
THESUBJECT-PRODUCTSISSUBJECTTOREGULAR IMPROVEMENTS,MODIFICATIONS
ANDCHANGES.CONSEQUENTLY,THEPUBLISHER ANDCOPYRIGHTOWNEROFTHIS
PUBLICATIONCANNOTACCEPTANY RESPONSIBILITYORLIABILITYFORANYEVENTUAL
ERRORSOROMISSIONSINTHIS BOOKLETORFORDISCREPANCIESARISINGFROMTHE
FEATURESOFANYACTUAL ITEMINTHERESPECTIVEPRODUCTBEINGDIFFERENTFROM
THOSESHOWNINTHIS PUBLICATION.THEPUBLISHERANDCOPYRIGHTOWNERSHALL
UNDERNO CIRCUMSTANCESBEHELDLIABLEFORANYFINANCIALCONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OROTHERLOSS,ORANYOTHERDAMAGEORINJURY,SUFFEREDBYANY
PARTY MAKINGUSEOFTHISPUBLICATIONORTHEINFORMATIONCONTAINEDHEREIN.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-9

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

1. Introduction 1-1

2. Engine storage requirements 2-1

2.1. Requirements for storage site 2-1

3. Storage period inspections 3-1

3.1. Inspecting the engine externally 3-1
3.2. Inspecting the engine internally 3-1

4. Corrective actions 4-1

4.1. Repairing surfaces damaged by rust 4-1
4.2. Approved anti-corrosive agents 4-2

5. Extending the storage period every 12 months 5-1

5.1. Annual inspection 5-2
5.2. Rotating the crankshaft and the rotor 5-2
5.3. Wärtsilä factory protection renewal 5-3

6. Taking the engine into use 6-1

7. Keeping a preservation log 7-1
Table of Contents - i
1-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Introduction

1. Introduction V2

Note!
This document is a guideline for requirements to be followed, not a
complete work instruction that gives a detailed description on, for
example, the measures to be taken, needed oil quantities, recycling
possibilities of oils. Therefore competent professionals should be
used. Wärtsilä Service is recommended.

Prior to shipment from production factory, engines are corrosion
protected according to the Wärtsilä standard program.
Wärtsilä factory protection provides a protection durability of 12
months with no need for maintenance or internal inspections.

The owner of the engine is responsible for storing the engine as well
as for inspecting the engine externally at least once a month.

When the 12–month storage period is coming to a close, Wärtsilä

must be contacted and certain maintenance procedures performed.
1-1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-11

Engine storage requirements

2. Engine storage requirements

2.1. Requirements for storage site V2

● Store the engines and generating sets as well as possible spare
parts and tools primarily in a dry and well-ventilated facility free
from dust and dirt. If not stored indoors, the machines must be
completely covered by a roof.

● Place the engine and generating set on a flat, horizontal and

vibration-free surface. If vibrations can be suspected to exist,
take precautions to isolate the machines, for example, by placing
rubber blocks under the feet at two-meter intervals.

● Place all corrosion sensitive spare parts and tools possibly

delivered along with the engine/generating set at a height of one
meter in minimum, due to the impact of relative humidity.

● Check that the storage location provides sufficient space around

the machines for performing routine maintenance and headroom
to allow the overall protective covers to be both removed and re‐
placed.

A pre-lubricating pump with required filters must be available on site,

especially when the storage time is longer than 12 months. The pre-
lubricating pump should be movable so that it can be used for several
engines when necessary.

2-1
1-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Corrective actions

3. Storage period inspections V1

If it is necessary to store the engine for an extended period of time,
the protection and the external condition of the engine must be
inspected regularly during storage.

Check the engine externally monthly. If the environmental conditions

and storage site requirements are not met, check the engine more
frequently.

If abnormalities, such as tears or dislocation of the protective covers,

signs of condensation water or rust, are found in the external inspection,
check the engine internally.

3.1. Inspecting the engine externally V1

1 Open the tarpaulin and check the engine externally.

2 Check the temperature and relative humidity and record the values in
the preservation log.
3 Check that there are no harmful compounds at the storage site.

4 Check the vapor corrosion inhibitor (VCI) covers for condensation. If

condensation is considerable, check under the VCI covers. If
necessary, check the engine internally, repair any damages caused by
rust, and install a new VCI cover.
5 Replace the tarpaulin.
6 Check that the protective covers are in place and the ropes are prop‐
erly fastened.
7 Inform Wärtsilä about any abnormalities found during the inspection.

3-1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-13

Storage period inspections
3.2. Inspecting the engine internally V2

Check the engine internally, if abnormalities, such as tears or
dislocation of the protective covers, signs of condensation water or
rust, are found in the external inspection.

Note!
Do not let the engine be affected by weather conditions during the
inspection.

1 Open the crankcase covers of the first and last cylinder, the
corresponding covers of the camshaft and cylinder head, and the
covers of the hot box.

2 Check the rocker arms, valve heads, springs, fuel valves, and push
rods.
3 Check the shaft, bearings, cams, rollers, and gear wheels in the cam‐
shaft space.
4 Check the crankshaft, bearing covers, and gear wheels in the crank‐
case.

5 Check the external surfaces of the flexible coupling and the resilient
mountings.

6 Take appropriate measures to improve the protection of any parts
affected by corrosion.
7 Renew the VCI chips, VCI capsules and desiccant bags.
8 Inform Wärtsilä about any abnormalities found during the inspection.
9 Inspection of cooling water system:
 Thermostat housing on engine
 End cover opened for multi-duct
 Cooling water pumps
 CAC drain plug (see that it is properly sealed when assembly,
otherwise there will come air to CW system on high load)

3-2
1-14 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Corrective actions

4. Corrective actions

4.1. Repairing surfaces damaged by rust V1

If rust is found in the inspections, repair the damaged surfaces.
1 Remove all rust and oxidized surfaces.
2 Polish and clean the repaired surface.
3 Apply anti-corrosive agent approved by Wärtsilä on the repaired
surface.

4-1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-15

Corrective actions

4.2. Approved anti-corrosive agents V1

Table 4-1 A n t i -corrosive agents for the engine

Component Anti-corrosive agent
● Camshaft Shell Ensis DW 2455
● Crankshaft An oil-based corrosion inhibitor
forming a thin, transparent, grease-like
● Connecting rods
film. Dissolves into most lubricating
● Cylinder liners oils.
● Main bearings
● Gear wheels
● Valve mechanism
● Unpainted surfaces on the cylinder Tectyl 502 C
head
An oil- and wax-based corrosion
● Cylinder head screw threads inhibitor forming a thick grease-like
● Hot box (i.e. injection pumps,
and hydraulic oils.
control shaft, fuel pipes, other
unpainted surfaces)
● Internal surfaces of cylinders Shell Calibration Fluid S
● Injection valves An oil-based corrosion inhibitor
forming a thin, transparent, grease-like
● Internal surfaces of high-pressure
fuel pipes
oils.
● Unpainted external surfaces Tectyl 506 EH
● Flywheel A wax-based corrosion inhibitor form‐
ing a non-smudging, hard, brown,
● Indicator valves
transparent film.

Table 4-2 Anti-corrosive agents for the generator

● Unpainted external surfaces of the Tectyl 506 EH
generator
● Shaft Refer to the supplier's documentation.
● Bearing seals
● Bearings Refer to the supplier's documentation.
● Shaft extension Refer to the supplier's documentation.
● Coupling halves
● Jacking screws

4-2
1-16 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Corrective actions

Table 4-3 Anti-corrosive agents for the turbocharger

● Connecting flanges of the Tectyl 506 EH
turbocharger cleaning system
● Bearing surfaces Refer to the supplier's documentation.
● Oil passages Refer to the supplier's documentation.
● Thrust faces
4-3
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-17

Extending the storage period every 12 months

5. Extending the storage period every 12

months V3

If the storage period is going to exceed 12 months, contact Wärtsilä
at least 30 days before that and settle the following issues:
● Annual inspection.
● Rotation of the crankshaft and the rotor.
● Preservation/ anti-corrosive agents renewal.
● Interval for the external and internal inspections.
Contact Wärtsilä to settle turbocharger maintenance separately.

Note!
Regardless of the length of the storage period, perform the required
external and internal inspections and take the necessary corrective
actions.
5-1
1-18 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


5.1. Annual inspection V1

The annual inspection consists of:
● Inspecting the crank pin.
● Checking the LT and HT pumps for rust and deposits.
● Checking the turbocharger for corrosion.
- Cleaning and treating the components with protective oil for
corrosion inhibition.
- Sealing all openings.
- Removing the turbocharger from the engine if instructed by
Wärtsilä.
● Protecting the Wärtsilä-supplied generators against corrosion if
there have been problems in storing.
- Treating the shaft and bearing seals with a suitable
anticorrosive agent.

- Filling the bearings with the same protective oil that the
manufacturer has used.

- Improving the protection of unpainted surfaces such as shaft

extension, coupling halves and jacking screws.

● Renewing the VCI capsules, VCI chips and desiccant bags and
checking that the appropriate warning labels are in place.

5.2. Rotating the crankshaft and the rotor V2
1 Circulate engine oil in the lubricating system for approximately 15 mi‐

nutes using a pre-lubricating pump with required filters.
2 Open the rocker arm covers and check that all parts of the valve
mechanism are lubricated.
3 Check that the self-lubricating bearings of the generator are filled with
oil. If needed, refill the bearings with the protective oil used by the
generator manufacturer.
Note!

If the generator is equipped with flood-lubricated bearings instead of
self-lubricating bearings, connect and actuate the lubricating system

before rotating.

4 Check that there are no transportation devices or locking devices at‐
tached to the engine or the generator.

5-2
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-19


5 Turn the flywheel of the engine six to ten times during the procedure.

Caution!
Rotating the crankshaft may damage the protective film on the
bearing and cylinder liner surfaces. Also, atmospheric air may
penetrate the crankcase and combustion chamber. Check the
components and re-apply the appropriate anti-corrosive agents if
necessary.

5.3. Wärtsilä factory protection renewal V1

After the crankshaft and the rotor have been rotated, Wärtsilä
proceeds with the factory protection renewal.
5-3
1-20 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Taking the engine into use

6. Taking the engine into use V1

1 Prepare the engine for transportation at the storage site.
a ) Drain any oil out of the crankcase.
b ) Attach the locking device to the generator.
2 Transport the engine to the installation site.
3 Install the engine.
4 Remove all protective covers and VCI products.

Note!
Make sure that the engine remains protected as long as possible.

5 Remove the desiccant bags. The desiccant bags are located behind
the covers marked with red warning labels.
6 Remove the protective oil from unpainted external surfaces.
7 Reinstall any equipment removed from the engine during storage.
8 Commission the engine.
6-1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-21

Keeping a preservation log

7. Keeping a preservation log V3

The inspection and maintenance work on the engine or generating
set should be documented in the preservation log.
The log should contain the following information about the inspection:
● Date and time for each action
● Temperature and relative humidity
● Abnormalities (e.g. tears or dislocation of the protective covers,
signs of condensation water or rust) found
● Corrective actions performed
● Maintenance actions performed

The preservation log should be available to the installation and

commissioning personnel when the engine or generating set is
installed and taken into use after storage.
7-1
1-22 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Preservation log

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


Abnormalities
Rel.
Date and time Inspection Temp. (specify the Corrective actions Maintenance actions Remarks
humid.
component)

1-23
1-24

Preservation log

Abnormalities
Rel.
Date and time Inspection Temp. (specify the Corrective actions Maintenance actions Remarks
humid.
component)


Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 2. Main Engine
2. Main Engine
2.1 About the main engine

The main dimensions, locations of pipe connections, location of sensors, space required for
maintenance, weight and centre of gravity are shown in enclosed drawings.
2.1.1 Definitions
Fig 2-1 In-line engine definitions
2.1.2 Recommendations for operation

2.1.2.1 Starting and stopping
The engine can be started and stopped on HFO provided that:
● The engine and the fuel system are pre-heated to operating temperature. The HT-water
temperature must be min. 60°C and the lubricating oil temperature min. 40°C.
● The fuel feed system is in operation and heated fuel is circulated through the engine.
● The pre-lubricating oil pump is running.
Changeover to MDF for start and stop is not recommended.
2.1.2.2 Recommendations for idling and low load operation

Absolute idling (unloaded generator):
● Max. 10 minutes, if the engine is to be stopped after the idling. 3-5 minutes idling before
stop is recommended.
● Max. 6 hours if the engine is to be loaded after the idling.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-1

2. Main Engine Installation Planning Instructions
Operation below 20% load:

● Max. 100 hours continuous operation. At intervals of 100 operating hours the engine must
be loaded to minimum 70% of the rated output.
Operation above 20% load:
● No restrictions.
NOTE
For operation profiles involving prolonged low load operations, please contact
Wärtsilä.
2.1.2.3 Engine operating range

The recommended engine operating range is presented in drawing "Operating field".
Unless project specific changes have been agreed the following applies:
● Sustained operation in the overload area must be prevented by careful dimensioning of
the propeller, considering all operating conditions (weather, fouling etc.)
● Operation below minimum speed is not possible.
● Clutch engagement to be performed in the indicated speed range. A speed boost pulse
(temporarily increased speed reference) shall be sent to the engine speed control prior to,
and during, clutch engagement. This prevents too low speed in connection to clutch-in.
● The nominal speed of the engine should not be exceeded. In tug applications it is however
permitted to exceed nominal speed in order to reach full engine output (about 102% speed).
2.1.2.4 Restrictions for operation at low air temperature

● To ensure starting, the inlet temperature should be min. 5°C.
● For idling, the inlet air temperature should be min. 5°C.
● The lowest permissible inlet air temperature at high load is -5°C. At loads between 0 and
40% the air must be preheated. For lower temperatures special provisions shall be made.
2.2 Technical information

2.2.1 Technical specification
The Wärtsilä 6L20 is a 4-stroke, non-reversible, turbocharged and intercooled diesel engine
with direct injection of fuel.
Main particulars
Type designation Wärtsilä 6L20
Number of cylinders 6
Configuration in-line engine
Max. continous rating 1200 kW
Nominal speed 1000 rpm
Direction of rotation Clockwise
Turbocharger KBB ST ST4
2-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

2.2.2 Technical data

Wärtsilä 6L20
Engine output 1200 kW
Cylinder configuration 6L
Engine speed 1000 rpm
Bore 200 mm
Stroke 280 mm
Mean effective pressure 2.73 (27.3) MPa

(bar)
Mean piston speed 9.3 m/s
Combustion air system (Note 1)
Flow of air at 100% load 2.41 kg/s
Temperature at turbocharger intake, max. 45 °C
Air temperature after air cooler 50...70 °C
Exhaust gas system (Note 2)
Exhaust gas flow at 100% load 2.38 kg/s
Exhaust gas temperature after turbocharger at 100% load 355 °C
Exhaust gas backpressure, max 5 (0.05) kPa (bar)
Exhaust gas pipe diameter, min 400 mm
Calculated exhaust diameter for 35 m/s 391 mm
Heat balance (Note 3)
Jacket water 250 kW
Charge air (LT-circuit) 405 kW
Lubrication oil 170 kW
Exhaust gases 825 kW
Radiation etc. 49 kW
Fuel system (Note 4)
Pressure before injection pumps 700±50 (7±0.5) kPa (bar)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-3

Wärtsilä 6L20
Viscosity before engine (MDF), min 1.8 cSt
Max. MDF temperature before engine (TE 101) 45 °C
Viscosity range before the engine (HFO) 16...24 cSt
Max. HFO temperature before engine (TE 101) 140 °C
Fuel consumption at 100% load 195.3 g/kWh
Fuel consumption 50% load 194.0 g/kWh
Leak fuel quantity (MDF), clean fuel at 100% load 3.24 kg/h
Leak fuel quantity (HFO), clean fuel at 100% load 3.24 kg/h
Lubricating oil system
Pressure before engine, nom 450 (4.5) kPa (bar)
Priming pressure, nom. (PT 201) 80 (0.8) kPa (bar)
Temperature before engine, nom 66 °C
Temperature after engine, about 78 °C
Pump capacity (main), engine driven 48 m3/h
Suction height of engine driven pump, max 4 m
Pump capacity (main), separate 25 m3/h
Priming pump capacity (50Hz) 8.6 m3/h
Suction height of priming pump, max 3.5 m
Oil volume, nom 0.5 m3
Filter fineness 25 microns
Filter difference pressure alarm 100 (1.0) kPa (bar)
Oil consumption at 100% load, max. 0.5 g/kWh
Crankcase ventilation flow rate at 100% load 780 l/min
Crankcase ventilation backpressure, max. 0.3 kPa
HT cooling water system
Pressure at engine inlet, after pump, nom (+ static pressure) 200 (2.0) kPa (bar)
Pressure at engine inlet, after pump, max 350 (3.5) kPa (bar)
Temperature before engine, about 83 °C
Temperature at the engine outlet, nom 91 °C
Pump capacity, nom 30 m3/h
Pressure drop over engine 90 (0.9) kPa (bar)
Water volume in engine 0.12 m3
Pressure from expansion tank 70...150 (0.7...1.5) kPa (bar)
2-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Wärtsilä 6L20
Pressure drop in external system, max 120 (1.2) kPa (bar)
Delivery head of stand-by pump 200 (2.0) kPa (bar)
LT cooling water system
Pressure at engine inlet, after pump, nom (+ static pressure) 200 (2.0) kPa (bar)
Pressure at engine inlet, after pump, max 350 (3.5) kPa (bar)
Temperature before engine, max 38 °C
Temperature before engine, min 25 °C
Pump capacity, nom 36 m3/h
Pressure drop over charge air cooler 30 (0.3) kPa
Pressure drop over oil cooler 30 (0.3) kPa (bar)
Pressure drop over external system, max 120 (1.2) kPa (bar)
Pressure from expansion tank 70...150 (0.7...1.5) kPa (bar)
Delivery head of stand-by pump 200 (2.0) kPa (bar)
Starting air system
Air pressure, nom 3000 (30) kPa (bar)
Air consumption per start at 20°C 1.2 Nm3
Notes:
Note 1 At ISO 15550 conditions (ambient air temperature 25°C, LT-water 25°C) and 100% load.
Flow tolerance 5%.
Note 2 At ISO 15550 conditions (ambient air temperature 25°C, LT-water 25°C). Flow tolerance
5% and temperature tolerance 10°C.
Note 3 At ISO 15550 conditions (ambient air temperature 25°C, LT-water 25°C) and 100% load.
Tolerance for cooling water heat 10%, tolerance for radiation heat 30%. Fouling factors
and a margin to be taken into account when dimensioning heat exchangers.
Note 4 At ambient conditions according to ISO 15550. Lower calorific value 42 700 kJ/kg. With
engine driven pumps (two cooling water + one lubricating oil pump). Tolerance 5%.
2.3 Design of the engine room

2.3.1 Engine room arrangement
Sufficient space for operation and maintenance has to be provided around the engines. For
minimum centreline distance between the engines refer to the engine room arrangement
drawing. The required service space around the engine is stated in the service space drawing.
No obstructive structures should be located close to the engine driven pumps nor crankcase
or camshaft doors.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-5

2.3.2 Vibrations
Wärtsilä 20 engines comply with vibration levels according to ISO 10816-6 Class 5.
Fig 2-2 Coordinate system
2.3.2.1 External forces and couple

The ship designer should avoid natural frequencies of decks, bulkheads and superstructures
close to the excitation frequencies. The double bottom should be stiff enough to avoid
resonances especially with the rolling frequencies.
Table 2-1 External forces
Engine Speed [rpm] Frequency Fz [kN]

[Hz]
W 6L20 FZ = 0 for 6 cylinder engines
Table 2-2 External couples
Engine Speed [rpm] Frequency MY [kNm] Frequency MZ [kNm]

[Hz] [Hz]
W 6L20 MZ = 0, MY = 0 for 6 cylinder engines
2.3.2.2 Torque variations
Table 2-3 Torque variations at 100% load
Engine Speed Frequency MX Frequency MX Frequency MX

[rpm] [Hz] [kNm] [Hz] [kNm] [Hz] [kNm]
W 6L20 1000 50 13.4 100 5.2 200 0.4
2-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Table 2-4 Torque variations at 0 % load
Engine Speed Frequency MX Frequency MX Frequency MX

[rpm] [Hz] [kNm] [Hz] [kNm] [Hz] [kNm]
W 6L20 1000 50 6.8 100 1.3 150 0.4
2.3.3 Noise levels

The airborne noise level of the engine is measured as a sound power level acc. to ISO 9614-2.
The diagram is based on measured noise levels. The lower figures represent the lowest levels
found in the measurements, while 90 % of the measured values are below the higher figures.
Fig 2-3 Sound power level for engine noise, W 6L20
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-7

Fig 2-4 Sound power level for exhaust noise, W 6L20
2.4 Installation of the engine

2.4.1 Lifting the engine
The lifting tool is not supplied with the engine. The lifting arrangement is shown in the following
figure.
Fig 2-5 Lifting the engine
2-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Engine L [mm] A [mm] B [mm] V [mm] W [mm]
W 6L20 3200 824 675 1020 1720
2.4.2 Installation procedure

The alignment of the engine and the driven equipment must be within acceptable tolerances
in normal operating conditions. As the equipment is installed at a lower temperature than the
normal operating temperature, differences in thermal expansion between various parts must
be compensated for, by installing the equipment with certain offsets in cold condition. In
addition to thermal expansion also other predicted movements may affect the cold alignment
values. For this reason the following procedure shall be followed:
During the design phase the Shipyard shall prepare calculations and drawings showing how
the engine and driven machinery shall be aligned in cold condition in order to achieve correct
alignment in running conditions. The calculations shall be based on the information about
thermal expansion and movements which is provided by the equipment suppliers.
The Shipyard shall send these calculations and drawings to Wärtsilä for comments and
approval.
During the installation phase the Shipyard shall carry out the alignment of the equipment and
verify that the achieved cold alignment values are in accordance with a.m. calculations. The
alignment shall be verified after that all elements of the mounting arrangement have been
installed.
During the commissioning phase Wärtsilä will check the crankshaft deflections of the engine.
If both the alignment and the crankshaft deflections are within given limits, the installation may
be started.
After running at 60% load or more for at least 6 hours, Wärtsilä will check the crankshaft
deflections in "hot conditions". At the same time the Shipyard shall check the alignment. If
both the alignment and crankshaft deflections are within given limits, the installation may be
approved.
Documents to help you with the installation of the engine(s) can be found from enclosed
drawings.
2.5 Commissioning responsibility matrix

Act. Execution Guidence Witnessed
Main activities related to Wärtsilä scope of supply
Nr. by provider by Wärtsilä
A. Pre-Commissioning
A.1 Installation of the engine Buyer IPI No
A.2 Installation of external pipe systems Buyer IPI No
A.3 Installation of flexible pipe connections and supports Buyer IPI No
A.4 Installation of flexible coupling (Scope of supply depending) Buyer IPI No
A.5 Installation of auxiliaries delivered by Wärtsilä Buyer IPI No
A.6 Removal of all warning stickers and conservation material Buyer IPI No
from engines and engine oil sump
A.7 Installation of electrical grounding between engines and Buyer Buyer No
hull
A.8 Installation of external cabling to engine & auxiliaries Buyer IPI No
A.9 Installation of interface cabling between Wärtsilä supplied Buyer IPI No

equipment
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-9


A.11 Cleaning, flushing, testing and inspection of fuel oil pipe Buyer IPI No
systems, including expansion and day tanks
A.12 Cleaning, flushing, testing and inspection of lube oil pipe Buyer IPI No
systems, including sump tank
A.13 Cleaning, testing and inspection of compressed air system Buyer IPI No
A.14 Cleaning, testing and inspection of cooling water system Buyer IPI No
A.15 Cleaning, and inspection of combustion air and exhaust Buyer IPI No
gas system
A.16 External cable loop checks (ref. A7 and A 8) Buyer Buyer No
A.17 Power supplies available (ref. A7 and A 8) Buyer Buyer No
A.18 Installation readiness check sheets to be sent to Wärtsilä Buyer Buyer

(To be sent to Commissioning coordinator and SP PM be-
fore Wärtsilä commissioning work start)
B. Commissioning
B.1 Inspection of resilient mounts installation and filling-in of Buyer IPI Yes
the related form
B.2 Inspection of (flexible) pipe connections to engine Buyer IPI Yes
B.3 Inspection of (flexible) connections in exhaust gas system Buyer IPI Yes
B.4 Inspection of (flexible) connections in charge air system Buyer IPI Yes
B.5 Filling of systems (water, oil and fuel), verify cooling water Buyer IPI Yes
treatment
B.6 Sampling and analysis of lube oil, fuel oil and cooling water Buyer IPI Yes
(If reuse of lube oil after flushing)
B.7 Cold alignment of coupling and engine Buyer IPI Yes
B.9 Cold crankshaft deflection Buyer / IPI Yes

Wärtsilä
B.10 Spot check of lube oil, fuel, air and water system cleanness Buyer Wärtsilä Yes
B.11 Signal interface checking between equipments /systems Buyer / Buyer Yes
between Wärtsilä and Buyer scope Wärtsilä
B.12 Alarm testing Buyer Buyer Yes
B.13 Powering up and start up of auxiliary equipment Wärtsilä Yes
B.14 Prechecking of engine shut down functions Wärtsilä Yes
B.15 First start of engine, bearing run (5 min) Wärtsilä Yes
B.16 Engine shut down function test Wärtsilä Yes
B.17 Phase sequence check of generator Buyer Yes
B.18 Loading of engine to verify functionality of all external sys- Buyer / Buyer Yes
tems (Scope of supply depending) Wärtsilä
B.19 Verification of flow rates Buyer / Buyer Yes
Wärtsilä
C. Dock & Sea Trials
C.1 Loading of engine to verify functionality of all external sys- Buyer / Buyer Yes
tems Wärtsilä
2-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


C.4 Verification of safe loading of engines (e.g. loading ramps, Buyer / Buyer / Yes
combinator curve, etc.) (Tuning of propulsion plant or PMS) Wärtsilä Wärtsilä
C.5 Check of crankshaft deflection in hot condition Buyer / IPI Yes
Wärtsilä
C.6 Check alignment of coupling in hot condition Buyer / IPI Yes
Wärtsilä
C.7 Dock / Sea trial Buyer / Buyer Yes
Wärtsilä
C.8 Completion of Commissioning Certificate Buyer / Wärtsilä Yes
Wärtsilä
C.9 Removal of running-in filters (when applicable) Wärtsilä Yes
C.10 50 hrs maintenance (when applicable) Wärtsilä Yes
2.6 Component data, Wärtsilä scope of supply

2.6.1 Flexible mounting
1 set/engine of foundation bolts and equipment needed for the flexible mounting of the engine.
Refer to the instructions in section "Installation of the engine" and to the flexible mounting
drawings for more information.
2.6.2 Flexible pipe connections (6H01)

Table 2-5 Wärtsilä 6L20
Code Pipe connection Connection Qty/engine Refer to draw-

size ing
101 Fuel inlet OD18 1 v35a0719
102 Fuel outlet OD18 1 v35a0719
103 Leak fuel drain, clean fuel OD18 1 DAAB761464
1041 Leak fuel drain, dirty fuel OD22 1 DAAB761465
1043 Leak fuel drain, dirty fuel OD18 1 DAAB761464
207 Lube oil to el.driven pump DN100/PN16 1 DAAB761722
208 Lube oil from el.driven pump DN80/PN16 1 DAAB761717
213 Lube oil from separator and filling DN32/PN40 1 DAAB740704
214 Lube oil to separator and drain DN32/PN40 1 DAAB740704
301 Starting air inlet OD28 1 DAAB761473
401 HT-water inlet DN65/PN16 1 DAAB761658
402 HT-water outlet DN65/PN16 1 DAAB761658
404 HT-water air vent OD12 1 DAAB761457
451 LT-water inlet DN80/PN16 1 DAAB761661
452 LT-water outlet DN80/PN16 1 DAAB761661
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-11

Code Pipe connection Connection Qty/engine Refer to draw-

size ing
454 LT-water air vent from air cooler OD12 1 DAAB761457
457 LT-water from stand-by pump DN80/PN16 1 DAAB761661
701 Crankcase air vent DN65/PN16 1 DAAB740719
2.6.3 Spare set of flexible pipe connections (6H01)

The spare set include one flexible pipe connection of each kind listed in section "Flexible pipe
connections (6H01)"
2.6.4 Power transmission

Component Qty Installation documents
7C01 - Flexible coupling (flywheel) 1 / engine
7B01 - Flexible coupling fitting materials 1 set / engine
2.6.5 Packing and transportation

Component Qty Description
0Z11 - Tarpaulin 1 / engine For protection during transport
0Z12 - VCI-coating 1 / engine For rust protection of the engine(s).
0Y08 - Transport foundation 1 / engine The engine is provided with a temporary

wooden or steel foundation during transport-
ation.
2.6.6 0Y02 - Tools (engine)

One (1) set of tools according to the following tables.
Table 2-6 Tools for engine automation
Part No. Description Outline [mm] Weight Qty/Inst.

[kg]
848 113 Speed simulator n/a - 1
846 622 Crimping tool n/a - 1
846 623 Wire stripping tool, 6...14mm n/a - 1
846 624 Wire stripping tool, 4...8mm n/a - 1
387 022 Contact grease n/a - 1
846 213 Operating tool WAGO n/a - 1
2-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Table 2-7 Tools for main bearings

[kg]
851 001 Turning tool for main bearing shell 0.8 1
803 001 Bit 22 for hexagon socket screws, 1 in 0.9 1

square drive
822 001 Torque multiplier X-4 5.4 1
864 013 Extension bar B20x400 L = 400, d = 38 - 1
864 014 Extension bar B25x200 L = 200, d = 52 - 1
Table 2-8 Tool for camshaft

[kg]
861 169 Hydraulic tightening tool 14.6 1
Table 2-9 Tools for cylinder liner

[kg]
836 001 Extracting and lifting device 11 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-13


[kg]
841 009 Honing tool 3 1
836 002 Dismounting tool for antipolishing ring 1.2 1
836 003 Holder for cylinder liner - 2
Table 2-10 Tools for pistons

[kg]
832 002 Lifting yoke 1.2 1
843 002 Clamp device for piston rings 3.5 1
843 004 Retainer ring pliers 1.4 1
2-14 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


[kg]
843 003 Piston ring pliers unistress 0.4 1
Table 2-11 Tools for connecting rod

[kg]
803 011 Stud remover M30 0.4 1
861 157 Distance piece M36/M30 2.4 2
861 153 Distance sleeve 2.1 2
Table 2-12 Tools for hydraulic tightening tool for main bearing, connecting rod and cylinder head

[kg]
861 158 Hydraulic tightening tool 23 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-15

Table 2-13 Tools for cylinder head

[kg]
832 004 Lifting tool for cylinder head 1.6 1
846 010 Dismantling device for valves 2.2 1
841 001 Grinding tool for valves 0.4 1
848 004 Valve clearance feeler gauge 0.03 1
808 001 T-wrench for indicator valve 0.5 1
2-16 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Table 2-14 Tools for for injection equipment

[kg]
807 004 Socket wrench 22 0.2 1
806 009 Crowfoot-wrench 27 for injection pipes 0.1 1
806 010 Converting piece, 3/8"-1/2" 0.2 1
864 012 Test pressure equipment for injection 9 1

valve
841 020 Cleaning tool for injection valve sealing - 1

surface
846 022 Extractor for injection pump 0.7 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-17


[kg]
869 001 Timing tool - 1
846 023 Tool for injection pump - 1
846 016 Pressing tool for injection pump 1.7 1
846 030 Tool for injection valve - 1
807 022 Combination wrench - 1
807 023 Socket wrench 46 x 20 - 1
800 007 Engineers wrench 13 x 17 - 1
846 024 Extractor for injection valve - 1
2-18 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


[kg]
846 029 Installation tool for teflon ring - 1
Table 2-15 Miscellaneous tools

[kg]
848 001 Feeler gauge 0.05 1
848 002 Indicator gauge for crankshaft 0.7 1
808 011 Ratchet with torque arm 3/4 in 2.9 1
820 009 Torque wrench 75...400 Nm 2.5 1
820 014 Ring insert wrench, 19 0.05 1
861 025 Pins for hydraulic tensioning tool 0.1 2
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-19


[kg]
803 016 Mounting and dismounting device for 0.3 1
stud M36
803 017 Hex. Socket wrench 19, 1 in inner square 0.05 1
803 018 Bit 17 for hexagon socket screws, 4/4 0.06 1

in square drive
820 015 Torque wrench 150...800 Nm 3.1 1
820 008 Torque wrench 40...200 Nm n/a - 1
833 002 Lifting tool for charge air cooler 12.3 1
Table 2-16 Tools for turbocharger

[kg]
865 001 Tools for turbocharger - - 1
2-20 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

2.6.7 0Y04 - Spare parts (engine)

One (1) set of spare parts according to the following tables.
Table 2-17 Spare parts for main bearings

[kg]
100 007 Main bearing shell, upper 1.2 1
100 008 Main bearing shell, lower 1.4 1
100 010 Main bearing nut 0.6 2
100 014 Side screw for main bearing, short 3.2 2
100 017 Main bearing screw 2.4 2
100 028 Thrust bearing half 0.3 4
100 013 Side screw for main bearing, long n/a - 2
Table 2-18 Spare parts for cylinder liner

[kg]
100 002 Cylinder liner 41 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-21


[kg]
100 003 Anti-polishing ring for cylinder liner 0.9 1
100 023 O-ring for cylinder liner, Ø218 x 5.3 0.006 2
Table 2-19 Spare parts

[kg]
100 010 Cylinder head nut 0.62 2
100 024 Cylinder head screw 3.2 2
120 012 Cylinder head gasket 0.06 1
120 025 Cylinder head 89 1
120 026 O-ring for cylinder head, Ø29.5 x 5.3 0.001 1
2-22 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


[kg]
120 027 O-ring for cylinder head, Ø32.5 x 0.001 1
3.55
Table 2-20 Spare parts for cylinder valves

[kg]
120 013 Valve guide 0.6 6
120 017 O-ring, Ø61.6 x 2.65 0.001 4
120 018 O-ring, Ø72.7 x 2.65 0.001 4
120 021 Seat ring, inlet 0.1 2
120 022 Seat ring, outlet 0.1 4
121 002 Conic piece pair 0.05 6
121 003 Valve rotator 0.4 6
121 004 Spring 0.2 6
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-23


[kg]
121 005 O-ring, Ø13.94 x 2.62 0.001 6
121 006 Exhaust valve 0.6 4
121 012 Inlet valve 0.6 2
167 005 Injection valve complete 2.2 6
167 011 O-ring for injection valve, Ø53.57 x - 12

3.53
Table 2-21 Spare parts for connecting rod

[kg]
111 005 Bearing shell for big end bearing, 0.7 1
lower
111 006 Bearing shell for big end bearing, 0.7 1
upper
111 001 Connecting rod including screws and 39 1

nuts, gudgeon pin, bearing bush
2-24 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Table 2-22 Spare parts for pistons

[kg]
113 001 Piston 21 1
113 010 Gudgeon pin 7.1 1
Table 2-23 Spare parts for piston rings

[kg]
113 004 Piston ring I 0.2 1
113 005 Piston ring II 0.2 1
113 006 Piston ring III 0.1 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-25

Table 2-24 Spare part fuel injection pump

[kg]
165 001 Fuel injection pump 19 1
Table 2-25 Spare parts for fuel injection piping

[kg]
167 003 High pressure conncetion piece 0.3 1
167 012 High pressure fuel pipe 0.4 1
Table 2-26 Spare parts, gaskets

[kg]
200 018 Gasket between cylinder head and 0.02 1
multiduct
Table 2-27 Spare parts for monitoring system

[kg]
501 111 Engine Safety Module ESM n/a - 1
501 291 Power Distribution Module 24V/5A n/a - 1

PDM
2-26 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


[kg]
ST17# Camshaft Speed Sensor (for ESM, n/a - 1
12m)
SE16# Flywheel Speed sensor (govering, n/a - 1
12m)
PT4## Pressure sensor 6 bar n/a - 1
PT6##
PTZ2## Pressure sensor 10 bar n/a - 1
PT2##
PT#01 Pressure sensor 16 bar n/a - 1
PT311 Pressure sensor 40 bar n/a - 1
TE### PT100 63mm n/a - 1
TE50#1A Exhaust gas temperature sensor n/a - 1
LS103A FO Leakswitch, capacitive n/a - 1
2.6.8 Technical documentation

Publication Language Media Qty
Installation Planning Instructions English A4 binder 3 / vessel
Engine manuals, Wärtsilä 6L20 English A4 binder 3

Engine manuals, Wärtsilä 6L20 Russian A4 binder 3
Record Book of Engine Parameters English Paper 1 / engine
Classification certificates for equipment subject to class English Paper 1 / vessel

approval
2.6.9 Start-up support

According to contract.

DAAF405331 a Main engine drawing, W 6L20 ................................................... 2-29
V69C0276 - Engine room arrangement ......................................................... 2-30
V69C0301 C Service space requirements ...................................................... 2-31
DAAF007340 - Operating field ........................................................................... 2-32
DAAF408870 - Installation of resiliently mounted Wärtsilä 20 engines .............. 2-33
DAAE003263 A Recommended foundation design ............................................ 2-34
DBAE821779 - Installation instruction of resiliently mounted Wärtsilä 20/20DF
main engine ................................................................................ 2-35
V69L0245 B Alignment instructions for Wärtsilä 20 main engines ................. 2-61
WV98V036GB Measurement record, crankshaft alignment .............................. 2-69
WV98V041GB Measurement record, alignment of flexible coupling ................. 2-70
DAAF413442 - Connection flywheel / flexible coupling ..................................... 2-73
DAAE002458 B Factory acceptance test ............................................................ 2-74
v35a0719 c Flexible pipe connection [OD18] ................................................ 2-84
DAAB761464 a Flexible pipe connection [OD18] ................................................ 2-85
DAAB761465 b Flexible pipe connection [OD22] ................................................ 2-86
DAAB761722 c Flexible pipe connection [DN100/PN16] .................................... 2-87
DAAB761717 c Flexible pipe connection [DN80/PN16] ...................................... 2-88
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-27

DAAB745542 c Flexible pipe connection [DN32/PN40] ...................................... 2-89

DAAB761473 a Flexible pipe connection [OD28] ................................................ 2-90
DAAB761658 d Flexible pipe connection [DN65/PN16] ...................................... 2-91
DAAB761457 c Flexible pipe connection [OD12] ................................................ 2-92
DAAB761661 b Flexible pipe connection [DN80/PN16] ...................................... 2-93
DAAB740719 a Flexible pipe connection [DN65/PN16] ...................................... 2-94
2-28 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF405331 a - Main engine drawing, W 6L20
tve001 Vesterbacka
sal001 Ala-Seppälä
29.12.2017
29.12.2017
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-29

V69C0276 - - Engine room arrangement
2-30 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

V69C0301 C - Service space requirements
Approved
04.11.2003 IOS001
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-31

DAAF007340 - - Operating field
 Wärtsilä Finland Oy OPERATING FIELD

Finland Marine FP-Propeller
This doc is the property of Wärtsilä Finland Oy and shall neither be copied, shown or communicated to a third party without the consent of the owner.
Subtitle Product Made 06.07.2010 M. Ehrs Page Document No Rev

Performance Manual Wärtsilä 20 C6 Appd. 06.07.2010 K. Lehtonen 1 (1) DAAF007339 -
Revised date: Changed by: Approved by: D-message No.: 197434
W20 C6 operating field for Fixed Pitch Propeller
MCR = Maximum Continous Rating

CSR = Continous Service Rating
2-32 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF408870 - - Installation of resiliently mounted Wärtsilä 20
engines
a l
o v
p r
Ap
r o
F
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-33

DAAE003263 A - Recommended foundation design
Approved
01.06.2004 IOS001 Öst
2-34 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DBAE821779 - - Installation instruction of resiliently mounted
Wärtsilä 20/20DF main engine
 Wärtsilä Installation of resilient mounted

Finland Oy
Marine Solutions
W ärtsilä 20/ 20DF main engine
This document is the property of Wärtsilä Finland Oy and shall not be copied, shown or communicated to a third party without the consent of the owner.
Subtitle Product Made Page Document No. Rev.

D Klemets 13.3.2018
Apprvd
Mounts: RD214, 244 Wärtsilä 20, T Södö 16.3.2018 1 (26) DBAE821779 -
20DF
Rev. Date Made Approved Memo No. Explanation
Cont ent s
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 3
2. GENERAL PRINCIPLES .......................................................................................................................... 3
3. ENGINE FEET AND M OUNTS. ............................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Fixing plates .................................................................................................................................... 5
4. FIXING BOLTS ...................................................................................................................................... 6
5. FOUNDATION DESIGN ......................................................................................................................... 7
5.1 Foundation design recommendation for use of st eel shims ............................................................. 7
5.2 Foundation design recommendation for use of w elded steel chocks................................................ 8
5.3 Foundation design recommendation for use of resin chock ............................................................. 9
6. COLD ALIGNM ENT CALCULATION ...................................................................................................... 10
6.1 Rise of the engine shaft line ........................................................................................................... 10
6.1.1 Thermal expansion of engine block (H1) ................................................................................ 11
6.1.2 Thermal expansion of engine foundation (H2) ....................................................................... 11
6.1.3 Thermal expansion of System oil tank (H3)............................................................................. 11
6.1.4 Creep of the resilient mounts................................................................................................. 11
6.2 Rise of the gearbox centre line ...................................................................................................... 12
6.2.1 Thermal expansion of the gearbox foundation (H3) ............................................................... 12
6.2.2 Displacement of the gearbox shafts ....................................................................................... 12
6.3 Axial Displacement ........................................................................................................................ 13
6.4 Lateral Displacement ..................................................................................................................... 13
6.5 Free end PTO ................................................................................................................................. 13
6.6 Gearbox PTO/ PTI ........................................................................................................................... 13
7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................................... 14
7.1 Preparation ................................................................................................................................... 14
7.2 Cold alignment procedure ............................................................................................................. 16
7.2.1 Neutral axial position of crankshaft ........................................................................................ 16
7.2.2 Cold alignment readings on the engine – gearbox coupling .................................................... 17
7.3 Cold crankshaft indication readings ............................................................................................... 18
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-35

Page Document No. Rev.
2 (26) DBAE821779 -
7.4 Chocking alternatives .................................................................................................................... 19
7.4.1 Chocking w ith steel shims ...................................................................................................... 19
7.4.2 Chocking w ith w elded steel chocks ........................................................................................ 20
7.4.3 Chocking w ith resin chock ...................................................................................................... 21
7.4.3.1 Resin chock calculation example ............................................................................................ 21
8. HOT ALIGNM ENT CHECK ................................................................................................................... 24
8.1 Hot alignment readings on the engine – gearbox coupling ............................................................. 24
8.2 Hot crankshaft indication readings ................................................................................................ 24
2-36 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

3 (26) DBAE821779 -
1. INTRODUCTION
This instruction explains step by step how to install and align the Wärtsilä 20 main engine in resilient
mount ing applicat ions using RD214 or RD244 which are both (height adjust able) mount s.
It is acceptable to install the resiliently m ounted Wärtsilä 20 main engine using steel shims, welded steel
chocks and resin chock which are all described in this instruction.
Instructions for fixed mounted Wärtsilä 20 main engine are given in a separate document
2. GENERAL PRINCIPLES
The engine m ust be aligned to the equipment that is t o be driven by the engine and the alignment of the
crankshaft must be checked before fixing the engine to the foundation.
If the engine is to be aligned to a gearbox, the gearbox must have been aligned to the propeller or
interm ediate shaft before aligning the engine. Also the gearbox holding down bolts should be tightened.
The m ain objectives is that the engine is properly installed and that the engine shaft and the gearbox
shaft will be in-line w hen normal operating temperature has been attained. A proper alignment and
installation procedure also ensures that the engine can be started without risk of dam aging the
equipm ent .
Classification societies have specific rules regarding the fastening of the engine to the foundation. These
rules m ust be observed.
Not e!
Prior to installation, the shipyard must send detailed plans and calculations of the chocking and
bolting arrangement to the classification society for approval.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-37

4 (26) DBAE821779 -
3. ENGINE FEET AND M OUNTS.

Engine feet are bolted to the engine block and the resilient mounting com ponents are delivered
separately. The location of the resilient m ounts is always determ ined for each engine based on the
application. The correct location can be found in the pr oject specific engine drawing.
The m ounts are delivered pre-compressed with the internal limiter locking the mount. When the static
pressure of the engine weight is pressing on the mount, t he internal limiter will be released.
The resilient mounting components and mounts are showed in figure 1 and 2.
Figure 1 Engine foot including the resilient mount and fixing plate with jacking screw.
Figure 2 RD214 and 244 Resilient mount. (V46L0704)
2-38 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

5 (26) DBAE821779 -
3.1 Fixing plates

Fixing plates are delivered w ith the mounting system to be installed under the mounts to allow for
easier installation and drilling of the foundation t op plate. The fixing plates allow for the m ounts to
be loaded during alignment .
The fixing plates are manufactured according to Figure 3. Each plate has M 16 threaded holes in the
corners for jacking screws and M 20 holes for the fixing bolts corresponding to the holes in the m ount
feet. During installation the M 20 holes will be drilled to Ø22 mm to allow the fixing bolts to go
through the fixing plate.
Figure 3 Fixing plate
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-39

6 (26) DBAE821779 -
4. FIXING BOLTS
M 20 8.8 ISO4014 hexagon head screw s, washers (21/ 33 S3 DIN433) and nuts (M 20 DIN985) are used
to fasten the mounts.
Hot dip galvanized screw s should not be used together with friction insert self-locking nuts. Some
classification societies may have a requirement on m inimum bolt elongation, therefore reference
should be made to t he relevant classification society for minimum elongation for fastening bolts.
All classification societies do not specify a m inimum required bolt elongation, but the Germanischer
Lloyd (GL) specificat ion can be used as guidance:
ΔL 0.12 mm for ptot 3.5 N/ m m2
ΔL (m m) 0.0343 x ptot (ptot in N/ m m2) for ptot > 3.5 N/ m m2
The elongation of the bolts can be calculated using the following form ula (GL):
 L L L 
∆L = F ⋅  12 + 22 + .....+ n2  ⋅ 618⋅10−8
 D1 D2 Dn 
F = Tensile force in the bolt (N)
Li = Individual part length of the bolt corresponding to Di (mm)
Di = Individual part diameter of the bolt corresponding to Li (mm)
Before tightening, the bolt and nut t hreads as well as all the contact surfaces must be carefully
cleaned and lubricat ed w it h engine oil. “ M olycot e” and similar must not be used.
The bolts are t o be tightened according to the standar d or calculations t o ensure that the desired
t ensile force is achieved.
The maximum permissible bolt stress according to several of the m ajor classification societies is 80 %
of the yield strength for t he material.
In case of resin shock installation the tightening torque should be calculated according to the needed
pre-t ension using t he form ula:
Dkm
M = F p ⋅ ( 0. 16 ⋅ Pitch + 0 .58 ⋅ D pitch ⋅ µ G + ⋅ µK
2
2-40 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

7 (26) DBAE821779 -
5. FOUNDATION DESIGN
When designing the foundation, the selected chocking m ethod is to be noted as the chock height might
influence t he design height .
The foundation should be stiff in all directions to absorb the dynamic forces caused by the engine.
Especially t he foundat ion of t he propeller t hrust bearing (gearbox) should be dimensioned so t hat
deformations are avoided. The seating top plate under the resilient mounts should be level both in
t ransversal and longit udinal direct ion.
5.1 Foundation design recom mendation for use of st eel shim s

When using steel shims, the surface on the top plate under the fixing plate is to be m achined in order
to provide an adequate load bearing surface and to ensure that the mounting surfaces are parallel.
Holes are to be drilled (during installation) in the top plate through t he fixing plates.
Figure 4 Recommended foundat ion design and mount ing details when using steel shims. (DAAF413387)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-41

8 (26) DBAE821779 -
5.2 Foundation design recom mendation for use of w elded st eel chocks
It is also possible to use steel chocks that are to be welded to the foundation top plate. In this case
the fixing plates can be replaced w ith steel chocks that are manufactured according to the measured
thicknesses around the mount. Also in this case, the surface on the top plate under the fixing plates is
to be machined in order to provide an adequate load bearing surface and to ensure that the
mounting surfaces are parallel. There is no need to drill for holding bolts through the top plate as
long as the chock is thick enough t o achieve sufficient bolt elongation with threads in the chock.
Reference should be m ade to the specific classification society regarding minimum bolt elongation.
Figure 5 Recommended design of foundation and mount ing details when using welded st eel chocks (DAAF413387)
2-42 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

9 (26) DBAE821779 -
5.3 Foundation design recom mendation for use of resin chock

When using resin chock, there is no need to machine t he surface on the top plate under the fixing
plat es but t he foundat ion t op plat e should be level bot h in t ransversal and longit udinal direct ion.
Holes are to be drilled (during installation) in the top plate through t he fixing plates.
Figure 6 Recommended foundat ion design and mount ing details when using resin chock (DAAF413387)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-43

10 DBAE821779 -
(26)
6. COLD ALIGNM ENT CALCULATION

Not e!
If the cold alignment figures are not supplied by Wärtsilä they shall be sent for comments before starting
the actual alignment procedure.
Wärtsilä will comment on the planned cold alignment and the obtained alignment results in order
to assist the yard, protect the engine from serious mistakes and ensure that the engine w ill perform
sat isfactorily aft er commissioning. Alignment always requires a certain amount of judgem ent and
the correct cold alignment cannot be predicted with full accuracy. For this reason Wärtsilä does not
assume responsibility for a possible need to correct the alignment would this prove to be
necessary.
Due to the same reasons the only absolute requirem ent from Wärtsilä is that t he cold alignment is
acceptable for commissioning t he engine and t hat final alignment readings and t he crankshaft
indicat ion readings in hot (running) condit ion are accept able.
6.1 Rise of t he engine shaft line

An upward displacem ent of the engine shaft due to therm al expansion must be taken into account
when determining the radial cold alignment figures. The therm al expansion of the following parts
must be considered:
- H1 Engine block
- H2 Foundation
- H3 System oil tank
Figure 7 View of the engine connect ed to the gearbox.
2-44 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

11 DBAE821779 -
(26)
The thermal expansion of the various parts can be estimated using the following formula:
∆ H i = α ⋅ ∆ Ti ⋅ H i
∆H = ∑ ∆H i − Creep
Where: ∆H i = Vertical expansion of the various parts [mm]
∆H = Total vertical displacement [mm]
Hi = Height of the various parts [mm]
α ≈ 1.2 ⋅10−5 For steel [1/ ᵒC]
α ≈ 0.9 − 1.1⋅10−5 For cast iron [1/ ᵒC]

∆ Ti = Temperat ure difference, ambient working tem perature [ ᵒC]
Creep = Compression of the resilient mount due to load over time = 1m m
6.1.1 Thermal expansion of engine block (H1)

The t em perat ure of t he engine block usually ranges between 60 ᵒ - 80ᵒC, depending on engine room
temperature, etc. The crankshaft will rise because of t he engine block expansion. The centre of the
block, however, will rise more than the block ends. For this reason it is preferable if the engine can be
installed in a sagging position in cold condition according to drawing 3V62L0279 (attached). This can
be achieved by supporting the engine w ith the jacking screws at both ends of the engine. The ow n
weight of the engine is usually suitable to obtain the necessary sagging.
6.1.2 Thermal expansion of engine foundat ion (H2)

The engine foundation above the tank top can be assumed to reach the same temperature as the
engine room .
6.1.3 Thermal expansion of System oil tank (H3)

If the engine is of dry sump type with the system tank located in the foundation underneath the
engine, thermal expansion w ill occur w hen t he oil temperature rises during operation. This thermal
expansion must be taken into account since the oil tank is the most influential of the three listed
contributors. Unless other information is available a temperature of 60 - 70°C can be assumed. Since
part of the expansion can be assumed to happen towards the sea the expansion calculation should
consider only half of the system tank height.
6.1.4 Creep of t he resilient mount s

The resilient m ount will during tim e be compressed and the compression will be most directly after
installation. Therefore it is necessary to take the creep into account for cold alignment calculations.
The initial creep of the resilient mounts can be considered to be 0,5 m m.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-45

12 DBAE821779 -
(26)
6.2 Rise of t he gearbox cent re line

An upward displacem ent of the gearbox shaft due to t hermal expansion must be taken into account
when determining the radial cold alignment figures. The therm al expansion of the following parts
must be considered: (see figure 8)
H1 = Gearbox block
H2 = Gearbox feet
H3 = Gearbox foundation
The operat ing t emperat ures of various makes of gearboxes are different
(Usually betw een 50 - 60°C), therefore the instructions of the gear m anufact urer should be followed.
In principle t hough, t he displacement of t he gearbox shaft due t o t herm al expansion can be
calculated in a similar way as for the engine.
Figure 8 Transversal view of t he gearbox.
In case of two engines mounted to a twin-in-single-out gearbox, the horizontal expansion of the
gearbox must be taken into account as w ell. Note! though, that if the engines are mounted on a
common foundat ion, also t hey will be displaced horizontally.
6.2.1 Thermal expansion of t he gearbox f oundat ion (H3)

To estimate the gearbox foundation therm al expansion it can be assum ed that the steel structure
above the tank top w ill reach the same temperature as the engine room air. The engines system oil
tank m ust not extend under the gearbox due to risk for tilting the gearbox and thus get an angular
displacem ent in the engine to gear coupling. If the system oil tank extends under the gearbox it is
also a risk that the gearbox to propeller shaft alignment is disturbed.
6.2.2 Displacement of t he gearbox shaft s

Particularly in more complicated gears it is in order to consider the displacem ent of the shafts due to
reaction forces from the force transmitted by the gears. These displacem ents w ithin the bearing
clearance are obt ained from t he gearbox m anufact urer's docum ent at ion.
2-46 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

13 DBAE821779 -
(26)
6.3 Axial Displacement

The distance between the flyw heel of the engine and the coupling hub flange on the gearbox shaft or
in case of a dual fuel engine, the flange on the torque meter shall correspond to t he length of the
flexible coupling plus the axial displacement due to the therm al expansion of the gearbox pinion
shaft .
The inst ruct ion manual of t he flexible coupling should be followed regarding special not es, e.g.
whether the flexible elements should be m ounted during alignment control or not.
6.4 Lat eral Displacement

A flexibly mounted engine will be displaced due to the torque reaction as the load increases. The
displacem ent is mainly lateral and it is proportional to the output t orque. The effect is almost
negligible for the W20 engine and the crankshaft will be displaced approximately 0.5 for RD214 and
1mm for RD 244 at full load w hen compared to the position at zero load. A clockw ise rotating engine
will m ove towards the manoeuvring side of the engine and a counter-clockwise rotating engine w ill
move tow ards the rear side of the engine. This displacem ent is w ell within the tolerances for the
flexible coupling, but it is of course favourable if the engine is installed with a corresponding initial
offset in the opposite direction to the displacem ent. The displacem ent of the exhaust gas outlet due
to the torque reaction is about 3 mm at full load.
6.5 Free end PTO

If the engine is driving equipment with the free end PTO shaft, the equipment is to be aligned before
the engine has been bolted dow n t o ensure that there is no bending on the crankshaft. The vertical
displacem ent of the free end PTO equipment is also to be taken into account in t he cold alignment
calculations and is to be calculated in the same way as the rest of the components.
The axial therm al expansion is important as the crankshaft and the PTO shaf t will expand tow ards the
free end of t he engine.
On resilient ly mount ed engines, an ext ernal PTO shaft bearing cannot be used due t o t he movement
of t he engine.
6.6 Gearbox PTO/ PTI

If there is equipment driven by the gearbox PTO, the vertical displacement of the gearbox PTO
equipment is to be taken into account in the cold alignment calculations and is to be calculated in the
same way as the rest of the components.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-47

14 DBAE821779 -
(26)
7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
7.1 Preparat ion
1. Unpack the m ounts and check that there is a gap of about 2 mm betw een the adjusting nut (5)
and the t op casting (6) of each mount (see Figure ). Adjust the nut if necessary by holding the
spindle (2) with a 19 mm spanner and rotate t he adjusting nut (5) w ith a 90 mm spanner. One
turn of the adjusting nut corresponds to 2 mm in height. A gap of 2 mm w ill m ake it possible to
adjust the height of the m ount by –2 … +8 mm later on.
Figure 9 Mount component s
2. Rem ove t he engine st ands under t he engine
3. Lift the engine over the foundation and install the mounts on the engine feet according to the
locations showed in the project specific engine drawing. Hold the spindle (2) w ith a 19 mm
spanner while tightening the M 27 nut (3) w ith a 41 mm spanner. Tighten the M 27 nut to 700 Nm .
4. Install the fixing plates under each mount using the M 20 x 50 bolts. Tighten the bolts to 400 Nm .
5. Install the M 16 x 70 jacking screw s in each corner of each fixing plate. The jacking screw s should
prot rude t he underside of t he fixing plat e according t o t he planned chock height .
The adjusting screw s (Jacking screw s), M 16 x 70 are used to align the engine vertically in relation
to the gearbox. The engine is also supported by the adjusting screws, until the chocks have been
installed.
6. Lower the engine onto the foundation so t hat the engine is standing on the jacking screw s in the
fixing plat es.
7. The mounts internal limiter should now be released as the mount is compressed. Check and
adjust the limiter clearance in each mount so that the limiter is free to move (so that no f orce is
applied on the limiter). Release the M 27 nut (3) and check that the spindle (2) can be turned
easily with a 19 mm spanner. If this is not possible, release the load on t he m ount by means of
2-48 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

15 DBAE821779 -
(26)
the jacking screws (on the engine feet) until the limiter can be easily turned. Then hold the
adjusting nut (5) w ith a 90 mm spanner and turn the spindle (2) two turns in anti-clockwise
direction. Release the jacking screw s and check again t hat the spindle can be easily turned.
Not e!
Take care not to disconnect the spindle part (2) from t he internal limiter (8) w hen turning
t he spindle in an ant i-clockwise direct ion.
8. Inst all t he flexible coupling on t he engine and also t he coupling hub on t he gearbox input shaft if
t his has not been done by t he gearbox m anufact urer.
9. In case of a dual fuel engine install also the torque meter on the hub flange.
10. M ove the engine so that there is a small gap betw een the coupling and the hub (in case of dual
fuel engine, t he t orque flange).
11. Weld or bolt brackets with adjustment screw s to the ship foundation on both sides and ends of
the engine for the horizontal alignment. These are only needed during the alignment of the
engine but could also be used for realignment if needed lat er on. The adjust m ent screw s should
push on t he fixing plat es.
12. The engine should now rest for about 48 hours to ensure that the initial creep takes place before
aligning t he engine.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-49

16 DBAE821779 -
(26)
7.2 Cold alignment procedure

13. The engine should now be support ed only by t he jacking screw s in t he fixing plat es and should be
so during t he alignm ent procedure.
14. Adjust the jacking screw s in the fixing plates so that each mount f oot is level.
M easure the height at 4 sides of each foot to the underside of the engine foot (see figure 10).
The m aximum allowed difference in height on the same mount is 0,6 mm .
Figure 10 Height measurement
15. Calculate and record the average height for each mount. The m aximum allowed difference of the
average betw een 2 mounts along one side of the engine is 2 mm and the maximum allowed
difference of the average betw een 2 mounts on each side of the engine is 2 mm. Adjust the
jacking screw s in the fixing plates until these values are w ithin the limits.
7.2.1 Neut ral axial position of crankshaft

16. The crankshaft is to be pushed to its ultim ate axial position in both directions and the readings on
the indicator are noted. A dial indicator can be used to measure the positions. Use a wooden
crossbar in one of t he crankcase service openings.
17. M ove the crankshaft using the wooden crossbar into t he correct position w hich is right between
the tw o readings.
18. The correct position of the input shaft of the gear can be determ ined in a similar w ay but
reference should be done to the gearbox m anufact urer for instructions how to set the shaft in its
neut ral posit ion.
2-50 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

17 DBAE821779 -
(26)
7.2.2 Cold alignment readings on t he engine – gearbox coupling

19. M ove the engine into position and connect the coupling to the hub. (in case of a DF engine, the
t orque flange)
Install the measuring device (dial indicators or laser equipment) according to figure 11, in such
way that the equipment is indicating the engine side and readings can be measured
simultaneously at two opposite sides. The bracket for t he m easuring device has to be made rigid
in order to avoid deflections that would distort the readings.
Figure 11 Flexible coupling and dial indicat ors
20. The reduction gear and the engine is to be turned and readings are taken at four different
positions 90° apart. This is done t o assure that t here is no angular displacement of the shafts.
Not e!
The shafts shall be turned only in one direction as t he shaft can slightly move radially w ithin
the bearing clearance or axially due to the helical gears, if the sense of rotation is changed.
Dial indicator "A" shows if the engine is out of centre, and dial indicator "B" show s whet her
21. Align the engine horizontally using the adjustment brackets and vertically using the jacking
screw s until the radial and axial alignm ent figures according to the coupling manufacturer’s
manual including t he cold alignment calculat ion values are at t ained.
Not e!
When pushing t he engine t o any direct ion horizont ally, loosen t he adjust ment bolt s on t he
opposite side to avoid possible shearing on the m ount s.the centre line of the engine is in
parallel with the centre line of the gearbox.
22. Check that all the mounts are straight. That the mount s are not sheared.
23. Send the m easured alignment values to Wärtsilä for review.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-51

18 DBAE821779 -
(26)
7.3 Cold crankshaft indication readings

Check the alignment of the crankshaft according to the procedure below. All measurements are to be
recorded on the Wärtsilä “ Crankshaft Alignm ent” form, attached. It is important t hat all data in the
document is recorded.
24. Turn the crank of the first cylinder near the bott om dead centre (BDC) and attach the indicator.
The distance between the indicator and the connecting rod should be as sm all as possible.
25. Set the indicator at zero
26. Read the deflections w hen turning the crank to the rear side, top dead centre (TDC), operating
side and BDC. Record the readings in the form "Crankshaft Alignment" (4V11L0450 attached)
Observe the labelling of readings (A, B, C, D and E), see Figure , and the sense of "+" and "-" which
might be contrary to the one indicated on the clock. During the indication procedure the engine
should be turned in its norm al sense of rotation only.
For the vertical alignment, the difference betw een C and its opposite reading, i.e. the mean value of E
and A should be used.
Figure 12 Dial indicat ors as seen from flywheel end
27. Repeat the procedure f or the other cylinders.
28. Send all the actual readings to Wärtsilä for approval.
NOTE! The cold alignment from Wärtsilä’ s factory test runs shall not be used as a reference for the
cold alignment calculations because the factory engine seating differs from a typical marine
installation. The acceptance test is also a tem porary arrangem ent where care is only taken to provide
a safe test run.
At each point where t he alignment is inspected it is essential to reserve enough time for a possible
rectification of the alignment, would the readings not be satisfactory.
When t he readings are approved t he chocking procedure can be st art ed w here finally t he holding
down bolts can be tightened
The engine must always be started and commissioned by a Wärtsilä representative.

The hot alignment is to be verified after the engine has attained normal operating temperatures. See
chapter 8.
2-52 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

19 DBAE821779 -
(26)
7.4 Chocking alt ernat ives

7.4.1 Chocking wit h steel shims
The engine should now stand on the jacking screws in the fixing plates and the cold alignment
should be complet ed.
29. M easure the vertical distance at 4 sides (figure 10) bet ween foundation top plate and the
underside of the fixing plate. Repeat this procedure with each fixing plate and record the values
on a prot ocol, where the location of each mount is clearly indicated.
30. M anufacture the steel shims according to the recorded measurements and mark each shim w ith
its location and orientation.
It is recom mended to aim for a shim thickness of about 30 - 40 mm . The thickness m ust under no
circumstances exceed the w idth or the length of the shim. Neither should the thickness be less
than 1 m m at any location of the shim.
The chocks m ust be machined and trued and the minimum width and length of the shims should
be according to the mount foot dimensions to secure sufficient load bearing surface. If the shims
are made according to dimensions 290 x 190, the shims can be inserted between the jacking
screw s in the fixing plates. If the shims are m ade with the same dimensions as the fixing plates,
cut outs should be m ade in the shims for the jacking screw s.
31. Place the correct shim in the correct position and orientation under each plate. It might be
needed to turn down t he jacking screws in the fixing plates to lift the engine slightly w hen
inst alling t he shims.
32. Release and remove t he jacking screw s in the engine feet .
33. Remove the M 20 bolts holding the fixing plate to the mounts.
34. Drill Ø 22 m m holes from above, through the holes in t he engine feet, the mount feet , the fixing
plate, the steel shim and the f oundation top plate.
Figure 13 drilling of fixing plate and ship foundation when using st eel shims or resin chocks
35. Counter bore the underside of the t op plate at the locations of the holes.
36. Place the fastening bolts from the underside in the holes that go through the foundation,
lubricate the threads and tighten to 400 Nm .
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-53

20 DBAE821779 -
(26)
37. Adjust the mounts internal limiter according to point 7.
7.4.2 Chocking w it h w elded st eel chocks
The engine should now stand on the jacking screws in the fixing plates and the cold alignment
29. M easure the vertical distance at 4 sides between the f oundation top plate and the underside of
the fixing plate. Repeat this procedure with each fixing plate and record the values on a protocol,
where the location of each mount is clearly indicated.
30. M anufacture the steel chocks according to the recorded measurem ents and mark each shim w ith
its location and orientation. NOTE! The threaded holes in the steel chock for the mount fastening
bolts should be drilled so that there is a free length to allow for bolt elongation.
The chocks m ust be machined and trued and the minimum width and length of the shims should
be according to the mount foot dimensions to secure sufficient load bearing surface. If the shims
are made according to dimensions 290 x 190, the chocks can be inserted between the jacking
screw s in the fixing plates.
31. Remove the M 20 bolts holding the fixing plate to the mounts.
32. Drill Ø 22 mm holes from above, through the holes in t he engine feet, the mount feet and the
fixing plate. See figure 13.
33. Place the manufactured steel chocks under each fixing plate.
34. Place fastening bolts with correct length through the mount feet and tighten by hand. Note!
hexagon socket head bolts might be needed t o avoid collision betw een the mount and the bolt
heads as the bolts need to be mounted from above.
35. Remove the jacking screw s in the fixing plates
36. Cover the m ounts thoroughly and weld the steel chocks to the foundation top plate. All sides of
the chock is to be w elded.
37. Apply Loctite 243 or similar on the bolts holding the m ounts to the steel chocks and tighten the
bolts to 400 Nm.
38. Adjust the mounts internal limiter according to section 7.5
2-54 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

21 DBAE821779 -
(26)
7.4.3 Chocking w ith resin chock

7.4.3.1 Resin chock calculat ion example
Note!
The engine alignment readings and the crankshaft indicat ion readings m ust be approved by
Wärt silä before t he resin chocks are cast. Sufficient t ime m ust be reserved for review of the
readings.
The used t ype of resin must have a Type Approval Cert ificat e from t he relevant
Classification society.
It is recommended t o aim for a chock t hickness of about 30 - 40 mm. The t hickness must
under no circumst ances be less t han 10 mm. Neit her should t he t hickness exceed t he w idt h
or t he lengt h of t he chock.
The maximum and minimum t hickness of t he resin chocks required by t he classificat ion
societ ies must be respect ed.
The surface pressure on t he resin caused by t he own w eight of t he engine, i.e. t he

deadweight load, must not exceed 0.7 N/ mm² according t o t he rules of DNV-GL.
The t ot al surface pressure on t he resin must not exceed t he maximum value, which depends
on the type of resin and the requirements of the classificat ion societ y. Several resin types
have a t ype approval for a t ot al surface pressure pt ot of 5 N/ mm², w hile other types are
approved for only 3.5 N/ mm², where:
pt ot = pst at ic + pbolt
pst at ic = surface pressure caused by t he engine w eight
pbolt = surface pressure caused by t he bolt t ension
The maximum permissible surface pressure also depends on t he t emperat ure of t he engine
feet . During normal operat ing condit ions, it can be assumed t hat t he maximum t emperat ure
of t he engine feet w ill not exceed 75Cᵒ. For specific values regarding t he t emperat ure
influence on t he resin, reference is t o be made t o t he select ed resin supplier.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-55

22 DBAE821779 -
(26)
As an example , the size of the resin chocks is 360 x 260 mm (according t o the fixing plat es).
Each chock w ould t hen have an effect ive area of 93 600 mm².
The 9L20 is installed on 6 m ounts giving the total surface area 561600 mm².
The w eight of a 9L20 engine used in this exam ple is 13.2 tons.
The static pressure ( p st at ic) would t hen be:
13200 ⋅ 9 .81 N
p static = = 0 .23
561600 mm 2
* The presented weights are estimated weights, including cooling water, lubrication oil, flywheel etc.
The exact weight for the specific project is indicated in the project specific engine drawing.
Applying t he conservat ive value pt ot ≤ 5.0 N/ mm² as a constraint for the maximum tot al
surface pressure on the resin the maximum allow ed bolt t ension load (pbolt) of approx.
4.77 N/ mm².
The num ber of fixing bolt s in t his example w ould be 24 giving t he t ensile force of each bolt :
4 .77 ⋅ 561600
Fp = = 111kN
24
Using a free lengt h of 115 mm and 8.8 bolt lengt h of 160 mm as an example, t he bolt
elongat ion according t o chapt er 5 w ould t hen be:
 108 7 
∆L = 111000 ⋅  2 + 2 
⋅ 618 ⋅10− 8 = 0.2 mm
 20 18.376 
Tight ening t orque w ould t hen be:
Dkm
M = F p ⋅ (0.16 ⋅ Pitch + 0.58 ⋅ D pitch ⋅ µG + ⋅ µK
2
26
M = 111⋅ (0.16 ⋅ 2.5 + 0.58 ⋅18.376 ⋅ 0.12 + ⋅ 0.14
2
M = 388 Nm
2-56 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

23 DBAE821779 -
(26)
29. The engine should now stand on the jacking screws in the fixing plates and the cold alignment
30. Remove the short bolts holding the m ounts to the fixing plates.
31. Drill Ø 22 m m holes from above, through the holes in t he engine feet, the mount feet , the fixing
plate and the foundation top plate.
32. Count er bore t he underside of t he t op plat e t hrough t he holes.
33. M easure the distance between t he foundation top plate and the underside of the fixing plate.
34. Cut pieces of rubber hose according to the m easured length. The fixing bolts are to be placed
inside the hoses when installing them to avoid the resin sticking to the bolts.
35. Place longer bolts from the underside of the foundation, tighten by hand.
36. M anufacture m olds around the fixing plates for the casting.
37. Cast the resin.
38. Once the resin has set, lubricate the threads on t he bolts and tighten them to the calculated
tightening torque according to the project specific resin chock calculation.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-57

24 DBAE821779 -
(26)
8. HOT ALIGNM ENT CHECK

Hot alignment check is to be performed after the engine has been installed and aligned and run for
about 6 hours above 60%. The engine should have t hen reached t he normal running t emperat ure.
The readings are to be taken within 30 minutes after shutting down the engine.
8.1 Hot alignment readings on the engine – gearbox coupling

Using the same procedure as in 7.2.2, check that the radial and axial alignment figures are
according t o t he coupling manufact urer’s manual
8.2 Hot crankshaft indication readings

The limits of the crankshaft readings for an engine having normal running t emperature
(w ithin 30 minutes after running f or more than 6 hours above 60% load) are:
a) On the same crank…

Aft er installat ion, the difference bet ween t wo diametrically opposed readings must not
exceed 0.04 mm.
Realignment is needed if t his value is exceeded.
During maint enance, realignment is necessary w hen t he reading exceeds 0.06 mm
b) On two adjacent cranks…

The difference bet w een t wo corresponding readings must not exceed 0.04 mm.
Realignment is necessary if t his value is exceeded.
c) W hen the piston of cylinder no. 1 is at TDC (dial indicator at position C)…
The reading should be negat ive, max. -0.8 mm.
2-58 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-59

2-60 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

V69L0245 B - Alignment instructions for Wärtsilä 20 main
engines
¤ Wärtsilä ALIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS FOR

Finland Oy
WÄRTSILÄ 20 MAIN ENGINES
✁ ✂ ✄ ✁ ✂ ☎ ✆ ✆ ✟
✝ ✡
✞ ☞
✠ ☛
Marine
✌✎✍ ✏ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✔ ✍✕ ✄ ✁ ✂ ✄ ✁ ✂ ☎ ✆ ✆ ✝✟✖✘✗✘✔ ☎☞✙ ✚ ✛

✜✣✢ ☎ ✂ ✄ ☎ ✂ ✄ ✄ ✤✦✥ ✧ ✌★✞✪✩✬✫✮✭✯✤ ✚ ✝ ✆ ✰✲✱ ✳ ✱ ✏ ✱ ✴ ✵ ✱ ✒✲✑ ✶✕✏ ✱ ✔ ✷ ✑ ✱ ✸✹✸✪✶ ✵ ✺✪✻✼✱ ✴ ✑ ✒✽✵ ✾ ✷ ✴ ✿ ✱ ✸✘✂
Apprvd
4V69L0245 b
Rev. Date Made Approved Memo No. Explanation
1. GENERAL
This instruction applies to the engine to gearbox alignment only.
Before the engine is aligned to the gearbox, the gearbox must have been aligned to the
propeller or intermediate shaft. The gearbox holding down bolts should be tightened.
The main objective of the engine alignment procedure is that the engine shaft and
gearbox input shaft will be in line when normal operating temperature has been attained.
A proper alignment procedure also ensures that the installation can be started up without
risk of damage to the equipment.
The shipyard shall obtain installation specific alignment instructions for equipment which
is in its scope of supply.
Instructions for fitting the engines on resin or steel chocks are found in 4V69L1641 and
4V69L1640 respectively.
2. WORKING ORDER
− Clarify what parameters must be observed and determine the desired radial and axial
cold alignment figures of the coupling.
− If the cold alignment figures are not supplied by Wärtsilä they shall be sent for
comments before starting the actual alignment procedure.
− Align the engine using jacking screws in the engine feet. Correct until desired radial
and axial coupling alignment figures are attained, see 3, Alignment Procedure.
− Check the crankshaft indication readings.

− Send all the actual readings for approval.
− When the readings are approved steel chocks can be machined or resin chocks cast
and the holding down bolts can be tightened
− The coupling alignment figures and the crankshaft indication readings shall be verified
after the bolts have been tightened.
− The engine must always be started and commissioned by a Wärtsilä Diesel

representative.
− The hot alignment is verified after the engine has attained normal operating
temperatures.
− At each point where the alignment is inspected it is essential to reserve enough time
for a possible rectification of the alignment, would the readings not be satisfactory.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-61

engines

❀✕❁ ❂ ❃ b
4V69L0245
Note !
Wärtsilä will comment on the planned cold alignment and the obtained alignment results
in order to assist the yard, protect the engine from serious mistakes and ensure that the
engine will perform satisfactorily after commissioning. Alignment always requires a
certain amount of judgement and the correct cold alignment cannot be predicted with full
accuracy. For this reason Wärtsilä Diesel does not assume responsibility for a possible
need to correct the alignment would this prove to be necessary.
Due to the same reasons the only absolute requirement from Wärtsilä is that the cold
alignment is acceptable for commissioning the engine and that final alignment readings
and the crankshaft indication readings in hot (running) condition are acceptable.
3. DETERMINING THE COLD ALIGNMENT FIGURES
3.1 Rise of the Engine Shaft Centre Line
Thermal Expansion
An upward displacement of the engine shaft due to thermal expansion must be taken
into account when determining the radial cold alignment figures. The thermal expansion
of the following parts must be considered:
- engine block
- foundation
- system oil tank
Fig. 1 View of the engine to gearbox coupling.
2-62 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

engines

❄✕❅ ❆ ❇ b
4V69L0245
The thermal expansion of the various parts can be estimated using the following formula:
∆Hi = α ⋅ ∆Ti ⋅ Hi
∆H = ¦ ∆Hi
Where: ∆Hi = Vertical expansion of the various parts, (mm)
∆H = Total vertical displacement, (mm)
Hi = Height of the various parts, (mm)
α ≈ 1.2 x 10-5 for steel and α ≈ 0.9 - 1.1x 10-5 for cast iron. Coefficient of
o
thermal expansion, ( 1/ C ).
∆Ti = Temperature difference, ambient → working temp. ( oC )
Thermal Expansion of Engine Block

The thermal expansion of the engine block must be considered. See fig. 1. The
o o
temperature of the engine block usually ranges between 60 - 80 C, depending on
engine room temperature, etc.
The crankshaft will rise because of the engine block expansion. The centre of the block,
however, will rise more than the block ends. For this reason it is preferable if the engine
can be installed in a sagging position in cold condition according to drawing 3V62L0279,
see appendix. This can be achieved by supporting the engine with the jacking screws at
both ends of the engine. The own weight of the engine is usually suitable to obtain the
necessary sagging.
Thermal Expansion of System Oil Tank

If the engine is of dry sump type with the system tank located in the foundation
underneath the engine, thermal expansion will occur when the oil temperature rises
during operation. This thermal expansion must be taken into account since the oil tank is
the most influential of the three listed contributors. Unless other information is available
an oil and system tank temperature of 60 - 70°C can be assumed. Since part of the
expansion can be assumed to happen towards the sea the expansion calculation should
consider only half of the system tank height. See fig. 1.
Thermal Expansion of Engine Foundation

The engine foundation above the tank top can be assumed to reach the same
temperature as the engine room. See fig. 1.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-63

engines

❈✕❉ ❊ ❋ b
4V69L0245
3.2 Rise of Gearbox Centre Line
Thermal Expansion of Gearbox

The thermal expansion of the reduction gear must be considered. The operating
temperatures of various makes of gearboxes are different ( usually between 50 - 60oC ),
therefore the instructions of the gear manufacturer should be followed.
In principle though, the displacement of the gearbox shaft due to thermal expansion can
be calculated in a similar way as for the engine. See fig. 2.
Fig. 2 Transversal view of the reduction gear.
In case of two engines mounted to a twin-in-single-out gearbox the horizontal expansion

of the gearbox must be taken into account as well. Note though, that if the engines are
mounted on a common foundation, also they will be displaced horizontally.
Thermal expansion of gearbox foundation

To estimate the gearbox foundation thermal expansion it can be assumed that the steel
structure above the tank top will reach the same temperature as the engine room air. The
engines system oil tank must not extend under the gearbox due to risk for tilting the
gearbox and thus get an angular displacement in the engine to gear coupling. If the
system oil tank extends under the gearbox it is also a risk that the gearbox to
propellershaft alignment is disturbed.
Displacement of gearbox shafts

Particularly in more complicated gears it is in order to consider the displacement of the
shafts due to reaction forces from the force transmitted by the gears. These
displacements within the bearing clearance are obtained from the gearbox
manufacturer's documentation.
Note !
The vertical displacement of the engine due to thermal expansion is usually larger than for
the gearbox. Hence, for the cold alignment, a typical figure is that the engine is installed
approximately 0.0 - 0.4 mm below the gearbox if dry sump and approximately 0 - 0.2 mm
below the gearbox if wet sump.
2-64 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

engines

●✕❍ ■ ❏ b
4V69L0245
3.3 Axial Displacement
Distance Between Flywheel and Reduction Gear Input Flange

The distance between the flywheel of the engine and the flange of the input shaft of the
reduction gear shall correspond to the total length of the flexible coupling including its
intermediate ring, if fitted plus the axial displacement due to the thermal expansion of the
gearbox pinion shaft.
The instruction manual of the flexible coupling should be followed regarding special notes,
e.g. whether the flexible elements should be mounted during alignment control or not.
4. ALIGNMENT READINGS
4.1 Neutral Axial Position of Crankshaft

Before the axial position is measured, the crankshaft of the engine must be set in a neutral
axial position.
This is achieved as follows:
− The stand of a dial indicator is placed on the engine in such way that the dial indicator is
indicating the "engine side" of the flywheel.
− The crankshaft is then pushed to its ultimate axial position in both directions and the
readings on the dial indicator are noted.
− The crankshaft is moved by using a wooden crossbar as a lever in one of the crankcase
service openings
− The correct position of the crankshaft is right between the two readings.
− The correct position of the input shaft of the reduction gear is determined in a similar
way.
4.2 Readings on the Engine- Gearbox Coupling

Dial indicators should be used as shown in fig. 3. Preferably two dial indicators are used
so that for example the “A” reading can be measured simultaneously at two opposite
sides. The bracket for the dial indicators has to be made rigid in order to avoid
deflections that would distort the readings.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-65

engines

❑✕▲ ▼ ◆ b
4V69L0245
Fig. 3 Flexible coupling
The bracket is fitted on the flange of the input shaft of the reduction gear.
The reduction gear and the engine are then turned and readings are taken at four
different positions 90° apart. This is done to assure that there is no angular displacement
of the shafts.
The shafts shall be turned only in one direction as the shaft can slightly move radially
within the bearing clearance or axially due to the helical gears, if the sense of rotation is
changed.
Dial indicator "A" shows if the engine is out of centre, and dial indicator "B" shows
whether the centre line of the engine is in parallel with the centre line of the reduction
gear.
4.3 Crankshaft Indication Readings

Check the alignment of the crankshaft according to the procedure below. All measurements
are to be recorded on the special Crankshaft Alignment document supplied by Wärtsilä. It is
important that all data in the document is recorded.
1) Turn the crank of the first cylinder near the bottom dead centre ( BDC ) and attach the
indicator. The distance between the indicator and the connecting rod should be as
small as possible.
2) Set the indicator at zero
3) Read the deflections when turning the crank to the rear side, top dead centre ( TDC ),
operating side and BDC. Record the readings in the form "Crankshaft Alignment".
Observe the labelling of readings (A,B,C,D and E), see fig. 4, and the sense of "+"
and "-" which might be contrary to the one indicated on the clock. During the indication
procedure the engine should be turned in its normal sense of rotation only.
2-66 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

engines

❖✕P ❖ ◗ b
4V69L0245
Fig. 4 Dial indicator as seen from flywheel end.
4) Repeat this procedure with the other cylinders.
5) The limits of the misalignment are stated for an engine having normal running
temperature (within 30 minutes after running for more than 6 hours above 60 % load)
are:
a)On the same crank...
The difference between two diametrically opposed readings must not exceed 0.04
mm after installing or realigning. Realignment is necessary, if this limit is exceeded
by more than 0.02 mm.
b)On two adjacent cranks...
The difference between two corresponding readings must not exceed 0.04 mm.
Realignment is necessary, if this limit is exceeded.
c)When the piston of cylinder no. 1 is at TDC (dial indicator at position C)...
The reading should be negative, max. -0.08 mm.
Note!
The cold alignment from Wärtsilä’s factory test runs shall not be used as a reference for
the cold alignment calculations because the factory engine seating differs from a typical
marine installation. The acceptance test is also a temporary arrangement where care is
only taken to provide a safe test run.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-67

engines
2-68 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

WV98V036GB - Measurement record, crankshaft alignment
MEASUREMENT
RECORD
Services, Wärtsilä Finland Oy

Engine section Engine type Ref. Date Issue Document No. Page
Crankshaft See below WFI–S 04-Mar-2016 8 WV98V036 1(1)
Installation name: Engine type: Engine No:

Unit, DG-set No.: Engine running hours:
Measurement tool(s):
Crankshaft alignment
Valid for: WÄRTSILÄ® Vasa 22ABC, 22HF, 22MD, 22/26, 32, 32LN, WÄRTSILÄ® 20, 20DF, 31, 31DF, 31SG, 32, 32DF, 32GD, 32LNGD, 34DF, 34LPG, 34SG
Engine connected to: Engine installed on: Engine condition: Engine Engine
Rigid Flex. cold warm
Alternator Steel chocks Engine running continuously before indicating h
Gear Chockfast Time between stop and indicating h min.
Free end PTO Flexible mounting Ambient temperature °C °C
Clutch, engaged Lubricating oil temperature (inlet) °C °C
Clutch, disengaged HT cooling water temperature (outlet) °C °C
ENGINE COLD ENGINE WARM

All readings in 1/100 mm. Fill in all information!
Cylinder number Cylinder number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
C
D
E
Date of measurement: Place: Name:
Wärtsilä Finland Oy Services 24 hrs Tel: +358 10 709 080

P.O. Box 252 (Tarhaajantie 2) Switchboard Tel: +358 10 709 0000
FIN-65101 Vaasa, Finland
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-69

WV98V041GB - Measurement record, alignment of flexible
coupling
MEASUREMENT
RECORD
Services, Wärtsilä Finland Oy

Engine type Ref. Date Issue Document No. Page
4-Stroke WFI–S 14-April-2016 7 WV98V041 1(3)
Alignment of flexible coupling

Please fill in applicable fields
Installation name:
Driving machine ☐ Engine ☐ Electric motor ☐ Gearbox ☐ Other

Make: Type: Serial number:
Running hours: Rotation speed [rpm]: Rotation direction [CW/CCW]:
Driven machine ☐ Alternator ☐ Gearbox ☐ Pump ☐ Compressor ☐ Other

Coupling ☐ Flexible type ☐ Clutch type ☐ Clutch engaged ☐ Coupling halves connected
Permitted radial Permitted axial shaft Permitted angular
displacement [mm] displacement [mm] displacement [degree]
Ambient condition [°C] Driving machine Driven machine Ship condition

Room temperature Ambient temperature [°C]
Foundation temperature Sun condition on ship [sunshine/cloudy]
Winding temperature Ship exposed to sun [evenly/SB/PS]
Housing/block temperature Draft [Fwd/Midship/aft]
Lubricating oil temperature Other
comments:
Cooling water temperature
Measuring equipment Calibration date:

Cylinder No. 1 crankshaft alignment verification

A B C D E
All readings in 1/100 mm.

2-70 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

coupling
Services, Wärtsilä Finland Oy Measurement Record

Issue Document No. Page
7 WV98V041 2(3)
Alignment measurement with dial indicators
Location of indicator base: ☐1 ☐2 Diameter at indicator A [mm]: Diameter at indicator B [mm]:
Turning direction: ☐ CW ☐ CCW
Radial indicator readings / Position (Indicator A) Axial indicator readings / Position (Indicator B)
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
All readings in 1/100 mm.
Remarks:
Date of measurement: Place:
Name:

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-71

coupling
Services, Wärtsilä Finland Oy Measurement Record

Issue Document No. Page
7 WV98V041 3(3)
Alignment measurement with laser beam tool
Vertical alignment (side view) Clarification notes
Radial offset [1/100 mm] Which machine is lower
Is the gap in top or bottom

Angular gap [1/100 mm]
and at what diameter
Horizontal alignment (top view) Clarification notes
Direction of offset of which

Radial offset [1/100 mm] machine e.g. driving machine
offset to port side
Location of gap e.g. gap on

Angular gap [1/100 mm]
starboard side at diameter x
Remarks:
Date of measurement: Place:
Name:

2-72 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF413442 - - Connection flywheel / flexible coupling
tve001 Vesterbacka
sal001 Ala-Seppälä
14.03.2018
14.03.2018
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-73

DAAE002458 B - Factory acceptance test
 Wärtsilä FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST FOR

Finland Oy
W20 Factory
WÄRTSILÄ 20 MARINE MAIN ENGINES

10.06.2004 JPS/Sundell
Apprvd
FAT Wärtsilä 20 10.6.2004 KRk/Rönnbäck 1(10) DAAE002458 b
Rev. Date Made Approved Memo No. D-message No:
b 24.6.2008 JJA006 MLU001 157120
Factory Acceptance Test
1 Introduction
The test is carried out as an overall check of the manufacturing quality and to establish that
the contractual commitments have been fulfilled. The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
comprises of a running-in part and an official FAT part.
The test is carried out in accordance with ISO 15550. The function of built on ancillary
systems and the performance of the engine is checked according to ISO 15550. Results are
recorded in a test report signed by Wärtsilä, customer (if present) and a representative from
a classification society.
At the end of the factory acceptance test the engine is inspected by the same
representatives mentioned above.
After inspection, the engines are protected against corrosion, cleaned and painted before
packing and shipment.
2 Test setup
Main engines are tested with an in-house generator which is loaded with resistive load
banks. Necessary pipe connections between the engine and the test bed systems are made
using in-house flexible hoses.
The cold alignment of the crankshaft is checked in the alternator assembly cell. The
measurement record is available at the test run department.
If the engine is equipped with a mechanical governor and a speed setting motor, the motor
is connected to a PC from which raise and lower commands can be given and the running
speed selected. If the engine is fitted with an actuator and electronic governor, the running
speed is controlled by a mA-signal from the in-house Woodward 723 Digital Controller.
If the engine is equipped with Basic Engine Automation System (BEA) or Wärtsilä UNIC C1
automation the engine mounted sensors are connected to the in-house PLC. If the engine is
equipped with advanced Wärtsilä UNIC automation System (C2 or C3) the measurement
logics and safety functions are located in the engine mounted control system. In either case
all engine mounted measurements are shown in the control room operator station and
customer facility display. Please see separate UNIC test instruction document
DAAE019891.
2-74 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

2(10) DAAE002458 b
2.1 Checks before starting
Check that measurements values in operator station are updated and that they are normal
for standstill condition. Check that there is no leakage when lubricating oil, fuel oil and
cooling water systems have been filled.
Check that there is no leakage in starting- and control air systems and that the engine starts
rotating when pressing the starting air solenoid valve.
Blow the engine by rotating it with starting air while keeping indication cocks open.
2.2 Checks with running engine
Check that there is no leakage in lubricating oil, fuel oil and cooling water systems.
2.3 Testing of instruments and functions
2.3.1 UNIC engines
Check the function of the local control buttons (start, stop and shutdown reset)
Verify that the engine speed (ST173 and ST174) are shown on the local display
Verify that the backup meters are working and show correct values
Verify that the hour counter is working
2.3.2 Basic automation engines
Check the function of the local control buttons (Emergency stop, start, stop and shutdown
reset)
Verify that the meters are working and show correct values
Verify that the hour counter is working
Verify that the engine speed is shown on the local display
Adjust the Engine overload sensor (GS166)
2.4 Testing of safeties with running engine
Check the first lube oil pressure trip (sensor PT201)

Check the second lube oil pressure trip (sensor PTZ201)
Check the overspeed trip (sensor ST173/ST174) by manually increasing the fuel rack.
Notes:
Set-points of pressure switches have factory settings and the switches are not recalibrated.
It is a classification society requirement that all shutdown functions and alarm set-points are
verified onboard when the ship is commissioned, regardless of any previous tests.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-75

3(10) DAAE002458 b
2.5 Calibration of measuring equipment
Measuring equipment related to calculation of fuel consumption are calibrated according to

the manufacturer’s specifications and the certificates are available on request.
3 Test Run
The test run is started with a running-in phase. The purpose of the running-in is to make
sure that possible manufacturing defects and leakages are eliminated and that all bearing
surfaces and piston rings are run in smoothly before the engine is delivered.
The first step of the running in is the bearing run. The engine idles for a few minutes, then it
is stopped and the temperature of the bearings is verified in the operator station.
During the running in process the engine loaded in steps. Between each step the engine is
allowed to idle for five minutes, see Fig. 1. Diesel Oil (LFO) is always used during the
running in process.
Running in program for Wärtsilä 20 engines
load
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
0:00 0:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 time (h)
Fig. 1 Typical running in program.
After running-in the test run is followed by the official FAT phase according to the program
stated in the contract. In addition to the running-in load-points, which are run at the nominal
speed, main engines are tested at 100, 110, 90, 75, 50 and 25 % load with the engine
speed following the propeller curve. The duration of 100 and 110 % load-points is
dependent on the requirements by the classification society concerned. The duration of the
propeller-curve load-points is 30 min at each point. If stated in the contract the fuel type
used at 100 and 110, 90, 75, 50 and 25 % load can be Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO) with a
viscosity of 180 cSt. If so an additional 20 min at 100 % load on LFO is run after completion
of HFO running to clean the heavy fuel from the engine. See examples of official FAT
programs in Fig. 2 to 5 below.
2-76 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

4(10) DAAE002458 b
Official FAT program for Wärtsilä 20 engines

DNV, LR, CCS
load
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30 time (h)
Fig. 2 Official FAT program for Main engines (LFO only)

DNV, LR, CCS
load
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30 time (h)
Fig. 3 Official FAT program for Main engines (HFO+LFO)

ABS, BV, GL, RINA, KR, NK, MR
load
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30 time (h)
Fig. 4 Official FAT program for Auxiliary engines (LFO only)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-77

5(10) DAAE002458 b

ABS, BV, GL, RINA, KR, NK, MR
load
100%
75%
50%
25%
0%
2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30 time (h)
Fig. 5 Official FAT program for Main engines (HFO+LFO)
Other durations than these can also be run depending on what has been agreed in the
contract.
3.1 Engine Performance Parameters
Performance data is recorded at 25, 50, 75, 100 % load at nominal speed and at 110, 90,
75, 50, 25 % load with engine speed following the propeller curve. According to ISO 15550,
the following parameters are recommended to be measured:
List A - Test Measurements (ISO 15550)
A1 Barometric pressure, humidity and ambient temperature

A2 Engine speed or cycle frequency
1)
A3 Engine brake torque and/or fuel pump or governor
A5 Fuel consumption
A6 Lubricating oil pressure
1)
A7 Temperature and pressure of exhaust gas leaving the engine
A8 Air inlet pressure and temperature at the engine or pressure charger inlet
2)
A9 Exhaust gas temperature at the turbine inlet
A10 Boost pressure in the air manifold
A11 Turbocharger speed
A12 Coolant mean temperature in and out of the cylinder block
A13 Lubricating oil temperature at the engine inlet and outlet
2)
A14 Boost pressure drop through the charge air cooler
A15 Boost pressure after each charge air cooler
A16 Charge air temperature after each charge air cooler
A17 Coolant mean temperature at the inlet and outlet of the charge air cooler
3)
A18 Maximum cylinder pressure
1)
A19 Exhaust-gas pressure at the turbine inlet
A20 Exhaust-gas temperature of each cylinder
A21 Individual coolant circuit temperatures and pressures
2-78 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

6(10) DAAE002458 b
1)
A22 Lubricating oil pressures in individual circuits, e.g. turbocharger, piston cooling, etc.
1)
A23 Lubricating oil pressure before and after filters and coolers
1)
A24 Secondary coolant and lubricating oil temperatures in and out of the heat exchangers
A25 Fuel supply pressure and temperature
1)
Not recorded
2)
Recorded on engines with UNIC
3)
Recorded at 75 and 100 % load
3.1.1 Firing pressure
The firing pressure of each cylinder is measured by a pressure indicator. The acceptance
criteria at 100% load are:
- The mean value of all cylinders is to be kept within the tolerances of +- 6 bar
(HFO) and +- 7 bar MDO
- The maximum deviation for any two cylinders to be within 10 bar
- The maximum deviation from mean value for each cylinder is 6 bar and no
cylinder is allowed to exceed:
-200 bar for 200kW/cyl.
-190 bar for 180kW/cyl.
Main reasons for deviations are:
- The fuel injection timing.

- Variations of air receiver pressure.
- Disturbances in injection pump or nozzle function.
3.1.2 Exhaust-gas temperature after cylinders
The exhaust gas temperature is measured for each cylinder. The maximum temperature
acceptance is 450ºC ±30 ºC.
Maximum deviation between cylinders is 90°C. However, in 8L engines cylinder 7 for CW

and cylinder 8 for CCW rotation can have temperature 80°C higher than the mean
temperature of the other cylinders. This is due the configuration of the pulse turbo charging
system and the cylinders firing sequence.
Main reason for deviation is changes in air receiver temperature.
3.1.3 Charge air pressure
The charge air pressure is measured using the engine mounted pressure gauge.
- The readings at 100% load to be within:

Max 180 kW/cyl. 3.00 bar ± 0.15
Max 200 kW/cyl. 3.53 bar ± 0.15
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-79

7(10) DAAE002458 b
3.2 Test results
List B - Test Results, Parameters to be Calculated (ISO 15550)
B1 Brake power
B2 Specific fuel consumption
3.2.1 Brake power
The brake power for the engine is calculated from the measured electrical active power and
the generator electrical efficiency. The efficiency of the generator is available from the
manufacturer’s data sheet and is provided by the marine department. Data sheets for in-
house generators are available at the test run department. The electrical power can be read
directly from the operator station.
3.2.2 Specific fuel oil consumption
The fuel oil consumption is measured with a scale. The consumption measuring system will
automatically measure the time the engine needs to consume a predetermined amount of
fuel, usually 2,5 - 20 kg, depending on the size of the engine.
The acceptance criteria for the engine fuel consumption are stated in the contract.
Samples of the fuel are periodically sent to an independent authority for analysis. The latest
analysis is available at the test run department on request.
To correct for ambient conditions during test differing from ISO 15550 standard reference
conditions, conversion formula as stated by ISO 3046-1, are used to obtain the specific fuel
consumption. See formula below.
In case the specific fuel consumption is presented as fuel consumption without engine
driven pumps the following reductions from the SFOC will be made since the engine is
equipped with following on-built engine driven pumps:
HT water pump 1.0 g/kWh (at 100 % load)

LT water pump 1.0 g/kWh (at 100 % load)
LO pump 2.0 g/kWh (at 100 % load)
LFO pump 1.0 g/kWh (at 100 % load)

Sea water pump 1.0 g/kWh (at 100 % load)
2-80 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

8(10) DAAE002458 b
Conversion Formula
 1 
α = k − 0.7(1 − k ) − 1
 m 
η
m n s
 p  T  T 
k =  x   r   cr 
 pr   Tx   Tcx 
BE = 
M − S ⋅ MLS 
 ⋅ 3600 [g/kWh]
 P⋅S 
α Qx
BISO = ⋅ BE ⋅ − EDP [g/kWh]
k Qr
Where: k = ratio of indicated power
α = power adjustment factor
px = barometric pressure during test [kPa]
pr = standard reference barometric pressure [100 kPa]
Tx = air temperature during test [K]
Tr = reference air temperature [298 K]
Tcx = charge air coolant temperature during test [K]
Tcr = reference charge air coolant temperature [298 K]
m = 0,7
n = 1,2 exponents to be used for 4-cycle diesel engines acc. to ISO 3046-1, table 3
s = 1,0
ηm = mechanical efficiency, 0.8
Qx = net calorific value of the fuel during test [MJ/kg]
Qr = reference net calorific value of fuel [42.7 MJ/kg]
BE = fuel oil consumption on test bed [g/kWh]
BISO = fuel oil consumption according to ISO [g/kWh]
M = measured fuel quantity [g]
MLS = flow of clean leak fuel [0.1 g/s cyl]
P = engine output [kW]
S = time [s]
EDP = engine driven pumps [4 g/kWh]
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-81

9(10) DAAE002458 b
3.3 Functional checks
[ISO 15550] “Functional checks which may additionally be carried out. Selection from list C shall be
made by agreement between the manufacturer and customer.”
List C - Functional checks, Functions to be verified (ISO 15550)

C1 The correct functioning of the overspeed limiting device in accordance with ISO 3046-6
C2 The correct functioning of the speed governing system in accordance with ISO 3046-4
C3 The ability of all malfunction protection and warning devices to respond correctly to the fault
conditions in which they should operate (e.g., low lubricating oil pressure, high lubricating
oil temperatures, high coolant temperatures, pressure rise in the crankcase, etc.)
C4 The correct functioning of all automatic pressure and temperature controls
C5 The ability of the starting system to perform prior to and/or after the acceptance test
conditions of the engine are reached, subject to agreement between the customer and
manufacturer
C6 The correct functioning of the reversing mechanism, built-in reverse reduction gear and
couplings
C7 That the temperature of important components is satisfactory
C8 That the crank web deflection is within the given limits
C9 Stability of the engine on its support
1) 2)
C10 The condition after test of one or more piston and cylinder assemblies and bearings,
chosen randomly for inspection
1)
Piston is not inspected
2)
Cylinders inspected only from crankcase side
Note: Points C1, C3 (low lube oil pressure shutdown), C8 and C10 are included in Wartsila
standard FAT procedures. See note at section 2.4 in this document.
3.4 Special tests
Other tests or checks can be done in combination to the factory acceptance test if specifically stated
in the contract, i.e. noise-, vibration- or emission measurement.
4. Crankshaft alignment check in hot condition
No hot deflection test is done for engines tested with the in-house generator, since the
installation is only temporary. The alignment in hot condition is to be verified after final
installation on board.
5. Inspection of engine
After the test run, the customer and the representative of the classification society are
invited to supervise the inspection of the engine. See instruction 4V59L0169 for details of
the procedures.
2-82 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10(10) DAAE002458 b
6. Finishing
After the inspection of the engine, there are a number of different items checked, just before
delivery. A separate instruction 4V59L0171 describes the details and other routines after
the test run, as well as the internal and external anticorrosion protection treatment and
painting of the engine.
7. Health and safety during FAT
The tests are made according to the factory internal health and safety instructions and way
of working. These are governed by the ISO 18001 standard.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-83

v35a0719 c - Flexible pipe connection [OD18]
2-84 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAB761464 a - Flexible pipe connection [OD18]
ALLOWED MOVEMENT LATERAL: ±50mm

MIN. BEND RADIUS: 150mm
MAX Wp: 30bar
NO AXIAL MOVEMENT ALLOWED
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-85

DAAB761465 b - Flexible pipe connection [OD22]

MAX Wp: 10bar
2-86 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAB761722 c - Flexible pipe connection [DN100/PN16]
RED / BLUE LABEL FOR OIL RESISTANT RUBBER.
Weight: 7,2kg
ALLOWED MOVEMENT
AXIAL LATERAL ANGULAR TORQUE: 90Nm
mm mm
- 40 / +10 ± 15 ± 15°
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-87

ALLOWED MOVEMENT Weight: 5,9kg

AXIAL LATERAL ANGULAR
TORQUE: 90Nm
mm mm
- 40 / +10 ± 15 ± 20°
2-88 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Weight: 4,4kg
ALLOWED MOVEMENT
mm mm
- 30 / +10 ± 15 ± 25°
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-89

DAAB761473 a - Flexible pipe connection [OD28]

MAX Wp: 30bar
2-90 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAB761658 d - Flexible pipe connection [DN65/PN16]
ORANGE / BLUE LABEL FOR HOT WATER.
Weight: 4,9kg
ALLOWED MOVEMENT
mm mm
- 30 / +10 ± 15 ± 25°
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-91

DAAB761457 c - Flexible pipe connection [OD12]

MAX Wp: 10bar
2-92 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAB761661 b - Flexible pipe connection [DN80/PN16]
ORANGE / BLUE LABEL FOR HOT WATER.
ALLOWED MOVEMENT Weight: 5,9kg

mm mm
- 40 / +10 ± 15 ± 20°
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 2-93

DAAB740719 a - Flexible pipe connection [DN65/PN16]

MAX Wp: 6bar
2-94 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 3. Fuel Oil System
3. Fuel Oil System
3.1 System overview

The engine is designed for continuous operation on HFO. It is also possible to operate the
engine on MDF intermittently without making any alterations.
The engine can be started and stopped on HFO provided that the HT-cooling water system
and the fuel system are preheated to operating temperature. Changeover from HFO to MDF
for start and stop is not recommended.
The lay-out of the fuel oil system is shown in drawing "recommended fuel oil system". If fuel
oil system components are included in our scope of supply they are listed in section
"Component data, Wärtsilä scope of supply".
3.1.1 Engine internal system

The following equipment is built on the engine (Wärtsilä 6L20):
● fuel injection pumps
● injection valves
● reducing valve in the outlet pipe
Clean leak fuel from the injection valves and the injection pumps is drained to atmospheric
pressure (Clean leak fuel system). The clean leak fuel can be reconducted to the system without
treatment. The quantity of leak fuel is given in the section "Technical data". Possible dirty leak
fuel, spilled water and oil is separately drained from the hot-box and shall be led to a sludge
tank (“Dirty” leak fuel system).
The arrangement of the built-on system is shown in the drawing "internal fuel system".
3.2 System design data

3.2.1 Fuel oil quality
Distillate fuel grades are ISO-F-DMA, DMZ, DMB. These fuel grades are referred to as MDF
(Marine Diesel Fuel).
Table 3-1 MDF specifications
Property Unit ISO-F- ISO-F- ISO-F- Test method

DMA DMZ DMB ref.
Viscosity, before injection pumps, min. cSt 1.8 1.8 1.8
1)
Viscosity, before injection pumps, max. cSt 24 24 24

1)
Viscosity at 40°C, min. cSt 2 3 2
Viscosity at 40°C, max. cSt 6 6 11 ISO 3104
Density at 15°C, max. kg/m³ 890 890 900 ISO 3675 or

12185
Cetane index, min. 40 40 35 ISO 4264
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-1

3. Fuel Oil System Installation Planning Instructions
Property Unit ISO-F- ISO-F- ISO-F- Test method

DMA DMZ DMB ref.
Sulphur, max. % mass 1.5 1.5 2 ISO 8574 or
14596
Flash point, min. °C 60 60 60 ISO 2719
Hydrogen sulfide. max. 2) mg/kg 2 2 2 IP 570
Acid number, max. mg 0.5 0.5 0.5 ASTM D664

KOH/g
Total sediment by hot filtration, max. % mass — — 0.1 3) ISO 10307-1
Oxidation stability, max. g/m3 25 25 25 4) ISO 12205
Carbon residue: micro method on the % mass 0.30 0.30 — ISO 10370
10% volume distillation residue max.
Carbon residue: micro method, max. % mass — — 0.30 ISO 10370
Pour point (upper) , winter quality, max. °C -6 -6 0 ISO 3016

5)
Pour point (upper) , summer quality, °C 0 0 6 ISO 3016

max. 5)
Appearance — Clear and bright 6) 3) 4) 7)
Water, max. % volume — — 0.3 3) ISO 3733
Ash, max. % mass 0.01 0.01 0.01 ISO 6245
Lubricity, corrected wear scar diameter µm 520 520 520 7) ISO 12156-1
(wsd 1.4) at 60°C , max. 8)
Remarks:
1) Additional properties specified by Wärtsilä, which are not included in the ISO specification.
2) The implementation date for compliance with the limit shall be 1 July 2012. Until that the specified
value is given for guidance.
3) If the sample is not clear and bright, the total sediment by hot filtration and water tests shall be
required.
4) If the sample is not clear and bright, the test cannot be undertaken and hence the oxidation sta-
bility limit shall not apply.
5) It shall be ensured that the pour point is suitable for the equipment on board, especially if the ship
operates in cold climates.
6) If the sample is dyed and not transparent, then the water limit and test method ISO 12937 shall
apply.
7) If the sample is not clear and bright, the test cannot be undertaken and hence the lubricity limit
shall not apply.
8) The requirement is applicable to fuels with a sulphur content below 500 mg/kg (0.050 % mass).
NOTE
This installation is designed for the fuel specified in section "Fuel oil specification".
The limits below are general for HFO operation.
The fuel specification "HFO 2" is based on the ISO 8217:2010(E) standard and covers the
categories ISO-F-RMA 10 to RMK 700. Additionally, the engine manufacturer has specified
the fuel specification “HFO 1”. This tighter specification is an alternative and by using a fuel
3-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

fulfilling this specification, longer overhaul intervals of specific engine components are
guaranteed.
Table 3-2 HFO specifications
Property Unit Limit HFO Limit HFO Test method ref.

1 2
Viscosity, before injection pumps 1) cSt 16...24 16...24
Viscosity at 50°C, max. cSt 700 700 ISO 3104
Density at 15°C, max. kg/m³ 991 / 1010 991 / 1010 ISO 3675 or
2) 2) 12185
CCAI, max.3) 850 870 ISO 8217, Annex

F
Sulphur, max. 4) 5) % mass Statutory requirements ISO 8754 or
14596
Flash point, min. °C 60 60 ISO 2719
Hydrogen sulfide, max. 6) mg/kg 2 2 IP 570
Acid number, max. mg KOH/g 2.5 2.5 ASTM D664
Total sediment aged, max. % mass 0.1 0.1 ISO 10307-2
Carbon residue, micro method, max. % mass 15 20 ISO 10370
Asphaltenes, max.1) % mass 8 14 ASTM D 3279
Pour point (upper), max. 7) °C 30 30 ISO 3016
Water, max. % volume 0.5 0.5 ISO 3733 or

ASTM D6304-C
1)
Water before engine, max.1) % volume 0.3 0.3 ISO 3733 or

ASTM D6304-C
1)
Ash, max. % mass 0.05 0.15 ISO 6245 or

LP1001 1)
Vanadium, max. 5) mg/kg 100 450 ISO 14597 or IP
501 or IP 470
Sodium, max. 5) mg/kg 50 100 IP 501 or IP 470
Sodium before engine, max.1) 5) mg/kg 30 30 IP 501 or IP 470
Aluminium + Silicon, max. mg/kg 30 60 ISO 10478 or IP

501 or IP 470
Aluminium + Silicon before engine, mg/kg 15 15 ISO 10478 or IP
max.1) 501 or IP 470
Used lubricating oil, calcium, max. 8) mg/kg 30 30 IP 501 or IP 470
Used lubricating oil, zinc, max. 8) mg/kg 15 15 IP 501 or IP 470
Used lubricating oil, phosphorus, max. mg/kg 15 15 IP 501 or IP 500

8)
Remarks:
1) Additional properties specified by Wärtsilä, which are not included in the ISO specification.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-3

2) Max. 1010 kg/m³ at 15°C provided that the fuel treatment system can remove water and solids
(sediment, sodium, aluminium, silicon) before the engine to specified levels.
3) Straight run residues show CCAI values in the 770 to 840 range and have very good ignition
quality. Cracked residues delivered as bunkers may range from 840 to - in exceptional cases -
above 900. Most bunkers remain in the max. 850 to 870 range at the moment. CCAI value cannot
always be considered as an accurate tool to determine the ignition properties of the fuel, especially
concerning fuels originating from modern and more complex refinery process.
4) The max. sulphur content must be defined in accordance with relevant statutory limitations.
5) Sodium contributes to hot corrosion on the exhaust valves when combined with high sulphur and
vanadium contents. Sodium also strongly contributes to fouling of the exhaust gas turbine blading
at high loads. The aggressiveness of the fuel depends on its proportions of sodium and vanadium
and also on the total amount of ash. Hot corrosion and deposit formation are, however, also influ-
enced by other ash constituents. It is therefore difficult to set strict limits based only on the sodium
and vanadium content of the fuel. Also a fuel with lower sodium and vanadium contents than
specified above, can cause hot corrosion on engine components.
6) The implementation date for compliance with the limit shall be 1 July 2012. Until that, the specified
value is given for guidance.
7) It shall be ensured that the pour point is suitable for the equipment on board, especially if the ship
operates in cold climates.
8) The fuel shall be free from used lubricating oil (ULO). A fuel shall be considered to contain ULO
when either one of the following conditions is met:
● Calcium > 30 mg/kg and zinc > 15 mg/kg
● Calcium > 30 mg/kg and phosphorus > 15 mg/kg
3.2.2 Fuel oil heating

The fuel oil viscosity-temperature diagram is attached to determine the preheating temperature
of the fuel oil.
3-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Fig 3-1 Fuel oil viscosity-temperature diagram
Example 1: A fuel oil with a viscosity of 380 cSt (A) at 50°C (B) or 80 cSt at 80°C (C) must be
preheated to 115-130°C (D-E) before the fuel injection pumps, to 98°C (F) at the centrifuge
and to minimum 40°C (G) in the storage tanks. The fuel oil may not be pumpable below 36°C
(H).
To obtain temperatures for intermediate viscosities, draw a line from the known
viscosity/temperature point in parallel to the nearest viscosity/temperature line in the diagram.
Example 2: Known viscosity 60 cSt at 50°C (K). The following can be read along the dotted
line: Viscosity at 80°C = 20 cSt, temperature at fuel injection pumps 74-87°C, centrifuging
temperature 86°C, minimum storage tank temperature 28°C.
3.2.3 Design considerations

When designing the fuel system the following matters shall be considered:
● The fuel feed system for HFO shall be of the pressurized type in order to prevent foaming
in the return lines and cavitation in the circulation pumps.
● The HFO pipes shall be properly insulated and equipped with trace heating. It shall be
possible to shut off the trace heating when running on MDF. The tracing pipes shall be
grouped together according to their use.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-5

● Any provision for changeover from HFO to MDF or vice versa during operation shall be
designed to obtain a smooth change in fuel temperature and viscosity. When changing
from HFO to MDF, the viscosity at the engine shall be above minimum viscosity limit before
engine in continuous operation and must not drop below the limit not even during short
transient conditions. In certain applications a cooler may be necessary.
● Main engine and generating sets are recommended to be connected to separate fuel feed
systems.
3.2.4 Calculation formulas

The total fuel oil consumption is calculated as follows. This formula shall be used when
calculation the consumption for selecting sizes of pumps, valves, separators etc. related to
the fuel oil system before the engines.
where:
FE = Fuel oil consumption for the engine, site fuel [kg/h]
FSH = Fuel oil consumption for the engine at ISO conditions [g/kWh]. See section "Technical data".
Add a tolerance of 5%.
QN = Site fuel caloric value [MJ/kg]
PS = Shaft output for the engine [kW]
Minimum flow requirement for a fuel oil system component or unit is calculated as follows:
where:
Q = Min. required capacity at injection temperature [m3/h] (for one engine)
FE = Fuel consumption for the engine, site fuel [kg/h]
CF = Circulation factor = 4:1 for HFO components

Circulation factor = 5:1 for MDF components
ρFUEL= Fuel oil density at injection temperature [kg/m3]
3.3 Recommended functions

The following functions are not included in Wärtsilä scope of supply. We recommend you to
design these functions as follows.
3.3.1 HFO separator unit (1N02)

3.3.1.1 General remarks
In ships intended for operation on heavy fuel, heating coils must be installed in the bunker
tanks, so that it is possible to maintain a temperature of 40...50°C when pumping the fuel to
the settling tank.
The fuel treatment system should comprise a settling tank and separators to supply the
engine(s) with sufficiently clean fuel. When operating engines on heavy fuel the dimensioning
3-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

of the separator is crucial. Therefore the recommendations for the design of the separator
should be closely followed.
3.3.1.2 Settling of heavy fuel

The settling tank (1T10) should normally be dimensioned to ensure fuel supply for min. 24
operating hours when filled to maximum. The tank should be designed to provide the most
efficient sludge and water rejecting effect. The tank has to be provided with a heating coil and
should be well insulated.
To ensure constant temperature in the separator, the settling tank temperature should be kept
as constant as possible. The temperature in the settling tank should be between 50...70°C.
The min. level in the settling tank should be kept as high as possible. In this way the temperature
will not decrease too much when filling up with cold bunker.
3.3.1.3 Separator system

Heavy fuel (residual, and mixtures of residuals and distillate) must be cleaned in an efficient
centrifugal separator before entering the day tank. The recommendations of separator
manufacturers should be closely followed.
3.3.1.4 Mode of operation

Two HFO separators, both of the same size, should be installed. The capacity of one separator
to be sufficient for the total fuel consumption. The other (stand-by) separator should also be
in operation all the time. Separators with controlled discharge of sludge (without gravity disc)
operating on a continuous basis can handle fuels with densities exceeding 991 kg/m3 at 15°C.
In this case the main and stand-by separators should be run in parallel. It is recommended
that conventional separators with gravity disc are arranged for operation in series, the first as
a purifier and the second as a clarifier. This arrangement can be used for fuels with a density
up to max. abt 991 kg/m3 at 15°C.
For MDF, a separate separator should be installed.
3.3.1.5 Separator feed pump (1P02)

The use of a high temperature resistant screw pump is recommended. The pump should be
separate from the separator and electrically driven.
The pump should be dimensioned for the actual fuel quality and recommended throughput
through the separator.
Design data:
Pressure, max 0.5 MPa (5 bar)
Temperature 100 °C
Viscosity (for dimensioning the electric motor) 1000 cSt
Suction filters should be fitted to protect the feed pumps. The filter should be equipped with
heating jacket in case the installation place is cold. The filter can be either a duplex filter with
change over valves or two separate simplex filters. Fineness 0.5 mm.
3.3.1.6 Separator heater (1E01)

The preheater is normally dimensioned according to the pump capacity and a given settling
tank temperature. The heater surface temperature must not be too high in order to avoid
cracking of the fuel.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-7

The heating should be thermostatically controlled for maintaining the fuel temperature within
±2°C. The recommended preheating temperature for heavy fuel is 98°C.
The required minimum capacity of the heater is:
where:
P = heater capacity [kW]
m = capacity of the separator feed pump [l/h]
Δt = temperature rise in heater [°C]
For heavy fuels t = 48°C can be used, i.e. a settling tank temperature of 50°C. Fuels having a
viscosity higher than 6 cSt at 40°C may need preheating before the separator.
3.3.1.7 Separator (1S01)

The fuel oil separator should be sized according to the recommendations of the separator
maker. The required service throughput of the separator is:
where:
QHFOS = Required capacity at 15°C [m3/h] (for one engine)
FE = Fuel consumption for the engine, site fuel [kg/h]
ρFUEL = Density of the fuel at 15°C [kg/m³]
CS = Separator safety factor, e.g. 15%.
The flow rates recommended for the separator for the grade of fuel in use are not to be
exceeded. The lower the flow rate, the better the efficiency.
3.3.1.8 Sludge tank (1T05)

The sludge tank shall be placed below the separators as close as possible. The sludge pipe
shall be continuously falling without any horizontal parts.
The principal lay-out of the transfer and separating system is shown in drawing "recommended
transfer and separating system".
3.3.2 HFO day tank (1T03)

Two heavy fuel day tanks should normally be dimensioned to ensure fuel supply for 8 operating
hours each when filled to maximum. The design of the tanks should be such that water and
dirt particles do not collect in the suction pipe. The tank has to be provided with a heating coil
and should be well insulated.
As continuous separation is common practice the temperature in the day tank will be close
to the separating temperature, which normally is 98°C. The temperature in the day tank shall
be kept at that level or at least at 90°C. This because the feeder/booster unit (1N01) is designed,
in most cases, with a fuel oil inlet temperature of 90°C.
3-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

An overflow pipe should be installed from the day tank to the settling tank. The overflow pipe
should be connected to the lower part of the day tank to recirculate water that may get into
the fuel after the separators.
The tanks and fuel feed pumps should be placed so that a positive static pressure of 30...50
kPa (0.3...0.5 bar) is obtained on the suction side of the pumps.
3.3.3 Feeder/booster unit (1N01)

3.3.3.1 Fuel feed pump (1P04)
The feed pump maintains the pressure in the fuel feed system. It is recommended to use a
high temperature resistant screw pump as feed pump.
Capacity to cover the total consumption of the engines and the flush quantity of the automatic
filter.
Design data
Pressure 0.6 MPa (6 bar)
Temperature 100 °C
Pressure control set point (at de-areation tank) 0.3...0.5 MPa (3...5 bar)
Suction strainers with a fineness of 0.5 mm should be installed for protecting the feed pumps.
The strainer should be equipped with heating jacket. The strainer may be either of duplex type
with change-over valves or two simplex strainers in parallel. The design should be such that
air suction is prevented.
A pressure control valve maintains the pressure in the de-aeration tank directing the surplus
flow to the suction side of the feed pumps or to the HFO day tank.
3.3.3.2 Automatic filter (1F08)

The use of an automatically cleaned back-flushing filter is recommended, normally as a duplex
filter with an insert filter as the stand-by half. For back-flushing filters the circulating pump
capacity should be sufficient to prevent pressure drop during the flushing operation.
Design data
Fuel viscosity acc. to specification
Temperature 0-100 °C
Preheating from 180 cSt/50°C
Flow equal as feed pump capacity
Operating pressure 1 MPa (10 bar)
Design pressure 1.6 MPa (16 bar)
Test pressure, fuel side 2 MPa (20 bar)
Test pressure, heating jacket 1 MPa (10 bar)
Fineness, back-flushing filter 90% separation above 20 µm (mesh size max. 35 µm)
Fineness, insert filter 90% separation above 20 µm (mesh size max. 35 µm)
Maximum permitted pressure drop for normal filters at 14 cSt:
For clean filter 20 kPa (0.2 bar)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-9

Design data
Alarm limit 80 kPa (0.8 bar)
3.3.3.3 De-aeration tank (1T08)

The volume of the de-aeration tank should be about 100 l. It shall be equipped with vent valve
and a low level alarm. It shall also be insulated and equipped with a heating coil. The vent
pipe should, if possible, be led downwards, e.g. to the overflow tank.
3.3.3.4 Circulation pump (1P06)

The purpose of this pump is to circulate the fuel in the system and maintain the correct pressure
at the engine.
Design data
Capacity see section "3.2.4 Calculation formulas"
Operating pressure 1 MPa (10 bar)
Temperature 150 °C
3.3.3.5 Heater (1E02)

Two heaters of equal size shall be installed, one operating and the other as stand-by. The
heaters shall be dimensioned to maintain an injection viscosity of the correct operating range
at the maximum fuel consumption and a given day tank temperature.
To avoid cracking of the fuel the surface temperature in the heater must not be too high. The
surface power of electric heaters should not be higher than about 1.5 W/cm2. The output of
the heater shall be controlled by a viscosimeter. As a reserve a temperature control may be
fitted.
The set point of the viscosimeter shall be somewhat lower than the required viscosity at the
injection pumps to compensate for heat losses in the pipes.
To compensate for heat losses duel to radiation a certain allowance should be added, e.g.
10% +5 kW.
NOTE
The heaters are to be provided with safety valves with escape pipes to a leakage
tank (so that the possible leakage can be seen).
3.3.3.6 Viscosity meter (1I02)

For the control of the heater a viscosimeter has to be installed. A temperature control shall
also be fitted, to be used as safety when the viscosimeter is out of order. The viscosimeter
should be of a design which stands the pressure peaks caused by the injection pumps of the
diesel engine.
Design data
Viscosity range (at injection pumps) see section "Technical data"
Temperature 180 °C
Pressure 1.6 MPa (16 bar)
3-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

3.3.3.7 Flow meter (1I01)

If a fuel consumption meter is required, it should be fitted between the automatically cleaned
filter and the de-aeration tank. If the meter is provided with a prefilter, it is recommendable to
install an alarm for high pressure difference across the filter.
3.3.4 HFO safety filter (1F03)

The safety filter is a full flow duplex type filter with steel net. The filter should be equipped with
a heating jacket. The safety filter shall be installed as close as possible to the engine.
Design data:
Fuel viscosity according to fuel oil specification
Design temperature 150 °C
Design flow equal to circulation pump capacity
Filter fineness 37 µm (absolute mesh size)
Maximum permitted pressure drop at 14 cSt:
- clean filter 20 kPa (0.2 bar)
- alarm 80 kPa (0.8 bar)
3.3.5 Collection leak fuel

3.3.5.1 Leak fuel tank, clean fuel (1T04)
Clean leak fuel draining from the injection equipment can, if desired, be re-used without
repeated treatment. The fuel should then be drained to a separate leak fuel tank, provided
with heating and insulation, and from there be pumped to the day tank. Alternatively, the clean
leak fuel tank can be drained to another tank for clean fuel, e.g. the bunker tank, the overflow
tank etc. The pipes from the engine to the drain tank should be arranged continuously sloping
and shall be provided with heating and insulation.
3.3.5.2 Leak fuel tank, dirty fuel (1T07)

Any leakage of fuel oil or water at the engine top is collected into the dirty leak fuel system.
Normally no leakage occurs during operation.
3.3.6 Supply of MDF

3.3.6.1 MDF Suction strainer (1F07)
A suction strainer with a fineness of 0.5 mm should be installed for protecting the feed pumps.
3.3.6.2 MDF circulation pump (1P03)

The purpose of this pump is to circulate the fuel in the system and maintain the correct pressure
at the engine. It is recommended to use a screw pump as circulation pump.
Design data
Capacity see section "3.2.4 Calculation formulas"
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-11

Design data
Design Temperature 50 °C
The pump should be placed so that a positive static pressure of about 30 kPa (0.3 bar) is
obtained on the suction side of the pump.
3.3.6.3 MDF pressure control valve (1V02)

The pressure control valve increases the pressure in the return line so that the required pressure
at the engine is achieved. Set point = 0.4 MPa (4 bar)
3.3.6.4 MDF day tank (1T06)

The diesel fuel day tank should normally be dimensioned to ensure fuel supply for 12...24
operating hours when filled to maximum.

3.4.1 Pressure control valve (HFO) (1V04)
Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. SPVF25C2F1A05
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 5.4
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1200.0
Connection (OD) ........................... 25
Temperature, max. (°C) ................. 150
Dimensional drawing .................... 4V17L0364
Installation instruction ................... SPV-E
3.4.2 Overflow valve (HFO/MDO) (1V05)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. SPVF25C2F1A02
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 5.4
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 250.0
Connection (OD) ........................... 25
3.4.3 Safety filter (HFO) (1F03)

Quantity ........................................ 1
3-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Type .............................................. 2.04.5.6
Model ............................................ Duplex
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 3.8
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1600
Connection (DN) ........................... 40
Fineness, absolute (micron) .......... 37
Size ............................................... 110.210
Heating media .............................. Steam or thermal oil
Dimensional drawing .................... Z102281
Electrical drawing ......................... Z45550
3.4.4 Suction strainer (MDF) (1F07)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. 2.04.5
Model ............................................ Duplex
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 2.8
Velocity, max (m/s) ........................ 1.0
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1600
Connection (DN) ........................... 32
Size ............................................... 90.145
Dimensional drawing .................... DN32 z102345
3.4.5 Circulation pump (MDO) (1P03)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. BT-HM32D4
Flow (m³/h) .................................... 3.0
Electric motor power (kW) ............ 2.2
Inlet pressure, min. (kPa) .............. 10.0
Discharge pressure (kPa) .............. 800.0
Frequency (Hz) .............................. 50
Voltage (V) ..................................... 400
Speed (rpm) .................................. 2900
Dimensional drawing .................... DBAE726400
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-13

3.4.6 Fine filter (MDO) (1F05)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. 2.04.5
Model ............................................ Duplex
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 3.0
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1600
Connection (DN) ........................... 32
Size ............................................... 90.145
Dimensional drawing .................... Z102272
3.4.7 Pressure control valve (MDO) (1V02)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. SPVF25K2F1A12
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 5.4
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1200.0
Connection (OD) ........................... 25
3.4.8 Cooler (HFO/MDO) (1E04)

Quantity ........................................ 2
Type .............................................. KS10-BCV-413B L900
Flow, fuel (m³/h) ............................ 2.8
Pressure drop, LT water (kPa) ....... 0.02
Pressure drop, fuel (kPa) .............. 0.05
Heat load (kW) .............................. 13.0
Outlet temperature, fuel max. 45

(°C) ................................................
Inlet temperature, fuel max. (°C) .... 54
Inlet temperature, LT water max. 38

(°C) ................................................
Cooling media .............................. FW
Dimensional drawing .................... KS10-BCV-413B
3-14 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


DAAF403286 - Internal fuel oil system ............................................................... 3-16
DAAF403287 - Recommended fuel oil system .................................................. 3-17
V76F6626 F Recommended transfer and separating system ........................ 3-18
Z102281 - 1F03 - Safety filter (HFO), dimensional drawing ........................ 3-19
Z45550 - 1F03 - Safety filter (HFO), electrical drawing ............................. 3-20
DN32 z102345 1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF), dimensional drawing ................ 3-21
Z45550 1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF), electrical drawing ..................... 3-22
Z102272 1F05 - Fine filter (MDO), dimensional drawing .......................... 3-23
4V17L0364 - 1V02 - Pressure control valve (MDO), dimensional drawing ..... 3-24
Z45550 1F05 - Fine filter (MDO), electrical drawing ............................... 3-26
KS10-BCV-413B - 1E04 - Cooler (HFO/MDO), dimensional drawing ...................... 3-27
daaf068591 - 1V04 - Pressure control valve (HFO), dimensional drawing ...... 3-28
SPV-E a 1V02/04/05 - control valve , installation instruction ................... 3-29
4V17L0364 - 1V05 - Overflow valve (HFO/MDO), dimensional drawing ......... 3-34
DBAE726400 - 1P03 - Circulation pump (MDO) ................................................. 3-36
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-15

DAAF403286 - - Internal fuel oil system
3-16 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF403287 - - Recommended fuel oil system
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-17

V76F6626 F - Recommended transfer and separating system
3-18 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Z102281 - - 1F03 - Safety filter (HFO), dimensional drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-19

Z45550 - - 1F03 - Safety filter (HFO), electrical drawing
Z45550
TYP4.36.2
09.01.06
G1/4
- +
G1/4
M20x1,5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 1a
P1 P2
SPECIFICATION:
PROTECTION CLASS: IP 65 2 3a 3
ELECTR. DATA: SWITCHING VOLTAGE V= MAX.= 250 220

FREQUENCY HZ MAX.= 0-60 0-60
SWITCHING CURRENT A MAX.= 1 0.8
MAKING AND/OR BREAKING CAPACITY
W/VA MAX.= 60/60 40/60
MATERIAL : GD - ALUMINIUM
RATING : MAX. PRESSURE 100 BAR
MAX. TEMPERATURE 150°C
RANGES OF PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL: DELTA P = 0 - 0.5 BAR

0 - 0.8 BAR
0 - 1.2 BAR TO BE SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERING
0 - 2.0 BAR
0 - 3.0 BAR
DESCRIPTION:
THE PURPOSE OF THIS DEVICE IS THE MEASUREMENT, AND VISUAL INDICATION OF THE DIFFERENCE IN
PRESSURE BETWEEN TWO POINTS, AND THE ESTABLISHMENT OF AN ELECTRICAL CONTACT WHEN THE
PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL ATTAINS A SPECIFIED FIGURE.
METHOD OF OPERATION:
A PLUNGER SEALED BY A DIAPHRAGM SEPARATES THE SPACE UNDER PRESSURE INTO TWO CHAMBERS.
A PRE-LOADED SPRING CAUSES THE PLUNGER TO TAKE UP ITS ZERO POSITION WHEN THE PRESSURE
DIFFERENCE DELTA P IS ZERO. AS THE PRESSURE DIFFERENCE INCREASES (DELTA P > 0), THE PLUNGER
IS FORCED TO MOVE AGAINST THE SPRING. AT THE SAME TIME, AN INDICATOR DISC IS MOVED
MAGNETICALLY, AND THEREFORE VIRTUALLY WITHOUT FRICTION, AND THE TWO REED CONTACTS ARE
ACTUATED.
THE RED SEGMENT OF THE INDICATOR DISC IS VISIBLE OVER A PRESSURE RANGE EQUAL TO
APROX.50-100% DELTA P . THE FIRST REED CONTACT IS ACTUATED AT 75% DELTA P1, AND THE SECOND
AT 100% DELTA P2.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTACT INDICATOR TYPE 4.36.2
3-20 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DN32 z102345 - 1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF), dimensional
drawing
Z102345
TYP2.04.5
30.09.2014
159
POS.1 95 140
S=220
413
N1
80
145
249
N2
129
10
22
92 N4
O 65
O 90
220
N3
110
12
92
95
DPI 4.36.2 AND 3-WAY TEST VALVES,DP=0,5 BAR
N1 FILTEREINTRITT DN32 S SIEBAUSBAU VOLUMEN 2x1 dm³

FILTER INLET DISMOUNTING OF THEFILTERELEMENT VOLUME
ENTRÉE DE FILTRE DÉMONTAGE DU PANIER VOLUME
N2 FILTERAUSTRITT DN32 GEHÄUSE GEGOSSEN, EN-GJS-400-15 LEERGEWICHT 18 kg

FILTER OUTLET HOUSING CASTED, EN-GJS-400-15 EMPTY WEIGHT
SORTIE DU FILTRE CORPS MOULÉ, EN-GJS-400-15 POIDS NET
N3 ENTLÜFTUNG G1/4 ALLGEMEINTOLERANZEN DIN ISO 2768-V POS.1 DIFFERENZDRUCKANZEIGER

AIR ESCAPE TOLERANCE DIN ISO 2768-V DIFF. PRESSURE INDICATOR
DÉSAÉRATION TOLÉRANCE DIN ISO 2768-V INDICATEUR DE DIFF. DE PRESSION
N4 ENTLEERUNG G3/8 BETRIEBSÜBERDRUCK: 16 BAR BEI 150°C MIT KORBSIEBEINSATZ

DRAIN WORKING PRESSURE: 16 BAR AT 150°C WITH BASKET ELEMENT
VIDANGE PRESSION DE SERVICE: 16 BAR À 150°C AVEC PANIERS À CORBEILLE
SUBJECT TO ALTERATIONS ÄNDERUNGEN VORBEHALTEN MODIFICATIONS RÉSERVÉES
DUPLEX FILTER DOPPELFILTER 2.04.5.90.145 DN32 FILTRE DOUBLE
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-21

Z45550 - 1F07 - Suction strainer (MDF), electrical drawing
Z45550
TYP4.36.2
09.01.06
G1/4
- +
G1/4
M20x1,5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 1a
P1 P2
SPECIFICATION:

W/VA MAX.= 60/60 40/60

0 - 0.8 BAR
0 - 2.0 BAR
0 - 3.0 BAR
DESCRIPTION:
ACTUATED.
AT 100% DELTA P2.
3-22 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Z102272 - 1F05 - Fine filter (MDO), dimensional drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-23

4V17L0364 - - 1V02 - Pressure control valve (MDO), dimensional
drawing
3-24 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

4V17L0364 - - 1V02 - Pressure control valve (MDO), dimensional
drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-25

Z45550 - 1F05 - Fine filter (MDO), electrical drawing
Z45550
TYP4.36.2
09.01.06
G1/4
- +
G1/4
M20x1,5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 1a
P1 P2
SPECIFICATION:

W/VA MAX.= 60/60 40/60

0 - 0.8 BAR
0 - 2.0 BAR
0 - 3.0 BAR
DESCRIPTION:
ACTUATED.
AT 100% DELTA P2.
3-26 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

KS10-BCV-413B - - 1E04 - Cooler (HFO/MDO), dimensional
drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-27

daaf068591 - - 1V04 - Pressure control valve (HFO), dimensional
drawing
Approved
09.01.2014 cgr005 Grannas

09.01.2014 tve001 Vesterbacka
3-28 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

SPV-E a - 1V02/04/05 - control valve , installation instruction
Pressure Limiting Valve SPVF

Operating Instructions
Industriehydraulik
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-29

Contents
Safety 1
Identification of safety instructions 1
General Safety Instructions 1
Address off Manufacturer 1
The Documentation 2
Description of Operation 2
Installation of the Pressure Limiting Valve 2
Constructions and Spares 3
Commissioning 3
Adjustment 3
Venting 3
3-30 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Safety
Identification of safety instructions
The safety instructions contained in these operating instructions are identified by the
following attention symbol:
If these instructions are not observed, danger to personnel and equipment can result.
General Safety Instructions

The operating safety of the equipment supplied is only guaranteed under the
prescribed conditions of use (see „Description of Equipment“). The stated limiting
values (see also „Technical Data“) must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
Personnel who are responsible for the installation, operation and the repair of the
pressure limiting valve, must possess an appropriate qualification; this can have been
obtained through training or relevant instruction. Such personnel must be acquainted
with the contents of this instruction.
During all work, the prevailing national regulations relating to accident prevention and
safety in the work place and, where appropriate, internal regulations of the operator,
must be adhered to, even where these are not named in this introduction.
During all work and prior to installation, the connecting pipelines must be de-
pressurised!
The operator must ensure that these operating instructions are accessible to the
personnel concerned at all times.
Address of Manufacturer Agent in Finland

KRACHT GmbH MILOCRAFT OY
Gewerbestrasse 20 Hyttimestarinkuja 6
58791 Werdohl FIN-02780 ESPOO
Tel. 0 23 92 / 935-0 +358 9 8190 360

Fax 0 23 92 / 935-209 +358 9 8193 3870
BSPV-006-01.98-E 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-31

The Documentation
These operating instructions describe the adjustment and venting of the SPVF pressure
limiting valve. The valve is manufactured in various versions.
The designated version of a particular valve is given on the type reference plate.
Description of Operation
The directly controlled pressure limiting valves are used to protect low pressure circuits, up
to a maximum pressure of 20 bar (SPVF 10, p max 30 bar).
In a cast hydraulic housing 10, a valve spool 30 seals the pressure chamber P from the
reservoir connection T, when acted on by the the pressure spring 70. When the set pressure
is reached, the valve spool 30 opens to create a connection between P and T. As the
pressure in P falls below the set pressure value, the valve closes.
Installation of the Pressure Limiting Valve

The valve should preferably be installed in a vertical attitude, with the adjustment screw
underneath.
Before installing the pressure limiting valve, the pipe work system must be cleaned to
eliminate dirt, scale, sand, swarf, etc. Welded tube, in particular, must be scoured or
scavenged. Cotton rags must not be used in the cleaning operation. The pipelines must be
connected to the valve in an absolutely stress-free condition.
The pipes and connections used must be those appropriate for the operating pressure
range. The pipe manufacturers specifications should be consulted!
On installation, care should be taken that no sealing material finds its way into the pipeline.
Sealing materials such as hemp and mastic are not permissible, since they can lead to
soiling and hence impair the function of the valve.
2 BSPV-006-01.98-E
3-32 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Constructions and Spares
Item Description Item Description Item Description

10 Housing 50 Protecting cap 100 Vent (bleed)
20 Plug 70 Pressure cap 110 Flat seal
30 Valve spool 80 Threaded rod 120 O-Ring
40 Spring guide 90 Hexagonal nut
Commissioning
Adjustment
The pressure limiting valve is set to the pressure required by the customer. It may be
necessary to carry out a check on the pressure setting during commissioning, since different
flow rates, oil viscosities and pipe lengths can affect the response value. In such cases a
manometer should be connected directly to the valve oil pressure connection. Their
characteristics are such, that each of the four pressure springs available is only suitable for a
limited range of setting pressures.
These pressure ranges are specified in the Spare Parts List 58 601/4.
The pressure setting adjustment is made by removing the protecting cap 50 and loosening
the hexagonal headed nut 90 on the threaded rod 80, by means of an internal hexagon ring
spanner.
Rotation to the right increases the pressure setting, rotation to the left decreases the
pressure. On achieving the desired pressure setting, the hexagon headed nut 90 must be
tightened and the cap 50
Venting
Pressure limiting valves only operate correctly when all the voids within the valve are filled
with hydraulic fluid. If the installed attitude is incorrect, air may collect in the spring chambers
and lead to hydraulic shock. In these circumstances the valve must be ventilated (bled). This
is achieved by unscrewing the vent screw 100 through one turn. Venting should occur at low
pressure and is complete when oil is discharged free of air bubbles. After venting, the vent
screw is tightened again.
Servicing and adjustments to the pressure limiting valve which require it to be dismantled,
are only to be carried out by trained and appropriately qualified personnel.
When dismantling the pressure limiting valve, the components must be directly protected
from damage and soiling.
Fluids emerging from the valve must be collected and disposed of in such a way that there is
no danger to personnel or to the environment. The currently applicable regulations must be
observed.
BSPV-006-01.98-E 3
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-33

4V17L0364 - - 1V05 - Overflow valve (HFO/MDO), dimensional
drawing
3-34 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

4V17L0364 - - 1V05 - Overflow valve (HFO/MDO), dimensional
drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-35

DBAE726400 - - 1P03 - Circulation pump (MDO)
Customer WARTSILA
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Project Krasnoe 04001
SERVICE MDF circulation pump

Liquid Diesel
ITEM
Viscosity 6-75 cSt 1
Temperature
TYPE BT-HM32D4 Quantity 1
Self-priming screw pump, with safety valve.
PUMP MOTOR (KW)

Flow 3 m3/h Power 2,2 kW
Total head 8 bar Voltage 400V-III
Freq. 50 Hz
NPSHr 3m RPM 2900
RPM 2900 Isol/Prot. F/IP-55
Abs. Power 1.46 kW Type 90L
Rated IN 4.55 A
Starting Is/IN 7
CONSTRUCTION
Execution Horizontal P. casing Ductil Cast Iron
Seal Mechanical C. spindle Nitrided Steel
S/discharge Ø 40/25 L. spindle Nitrided Cast Iron
Coupling Elastic
REMARKS
Viscosity for pump capacity=6 cSt
Viscosity for driving unit=75 cSt
Engine 2x6L20
08/01/2018 Rev0
3-36 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Customer WARTSILA
08/01/2018 Rev0
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 3-37

Customer WARTSILA
08/01/2018 Rev0
3-38 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 4. Lubricating Oil and Crankcase Ventilation Systems
4. Lubricating Oil and Crankcase Ventilation

Systems
4.1 System overview

Each engine should have a lubricating oil system of its own. The lubricating oil must not be
mixed between different systems. Engines operating on heavy fuel should have continuous
separation of the lubricating oil.
The lay-out of the lubricating oil system is shown in drawing "recommended lubricating oil
system". If lubricating oil system components are included in our scope of supply they are
listed in section "Component data, Wärtsilä scope of supply".
Oil vapours formed in the crankcase of the engine have to be ventilated out of the engine room
via the crankcase ventilation system. The outlet is to be equipped with a condensate trap.

● engine driven lubricating oil pump
● stand-by connection for the engine driven lubricating oil pump
● electric motor driven prelubricating pump
● lubricating oil cooler
● thermostat valve
● automatic filter
● centrifugal filter
● pressure control valve
● wet sump
The prelubricating oil pump is used for:
● filling of the lubricating oil system before starting
● continuous prelubrication of a stopped engine in a multi-engine installation always when
one of the engines is running
The arrangement of the built-on system is shown in the drawing "internal lubricating oil system".

4.2.1 Lubricating oil quality
NOTE
Contact Wärtsilä before using a non-validated lubricating oil. Lubricating oils that
are not validated have to be tested according to our procedures. Should
non-validated lubricating oils be used during the engine warranty period, and there
exist no agreement with the engine manufacturer about testing, the engine
guarantee does not hold.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 4-1

4. Lubricating Oil and Crankcase Ventilation Systems Installation Planning Instructions
4.2.1.1 Validated lubricating oils for the engine

The lubricating oil viscosity class is SAE 40 (ISO VG 150), minimum viscosity index is 95. The
required lubricating oil alkalinity is tied to the fuel specified for the engine, see table below.
Table 4-1 Fuel standards and lubricating oil requirements.
Cat- Fuel standard BN S content

egory [% mass]
A ASTM D 975-01 GRADE NO. 1-D, 2-D, 4-D 10...30 < 0.4
BS MA 100: 1996 DMX, DMA, DMB
CIMAC 2003 DX, DA, DB
ISO 8217: 2012(E) ISO-F-DMX - DMB
B ASTM D 975-01 GRADE NO. 1-D, 2-D, 4-D 15...30 0.4...2
BS MA 100: 1996 DMX, DMA, DMB
CIMAC 2003 DX, DA, DB
ISO 8217: 2012(E) ISO-F-DMX - DMB
ASTM D 975-01 GRADE NO. 4-D
ASTM D 396-04 GRADE NO. 5-6
C BS MA 100: 1996 DMC, RMA10-RMK55 30...55 ≤ 4.5
CIMAC 2003 DC, A30-K700
ISO 8217: 2012(E) RMA 10-RMK 700
F Liquid Bio Fuel 10...20 ≤ 0.05
(LBF)
In case a low sulphur (S max. 0.2 % mass) MDF is used, it’s recommended to use a lubricating
oil with BN of 10...15.
It is recommended to use in the first place BN 50...55 lubricants when operating on HFO. This
recommendation is valid especially for engines having wet lubricating oil sump and using HFO
with sulphur content above 2.0 % mass. BN 40 lubricants can be used when operating on
HFO as well if experience shows that the lubricating oil BN equilibrium remains at an acceptable
level.
In HFO operation BN 30 lubricants are recommended to be used only in special cases, such
as installations equipped with an SCR catalyst. Lower BN products eventually have a positive
influence on cleanliness of the SCR catalyst.
With BN 30 oils lubricating oil change intervals may be rather short, but lower total operating
costs may be achieved because of better availability provided that the maintenance intervals
of the SCR catalyst can be increased.
If both MDF and HFO are used periodically as fuel, lubricating oil quality has to be chosen
according to instructions being valid for HFO operation, i.e. BN 30 is the minimum. Optimum
BN in this kind of operation depends on the length of operating periods on both fuel qualities
as well as of sulphur content of fuels in question. Thus in particular cases BN 40 or even higher
BN lubricating oils should be used.
The intervals between lubricating oil changes may be extended by adding oil daily to keep the
oil level constantly close to the maximum level
Validated lubricating oils for fuel oil categories A, B and F

If MDF oil or LBF is used as fuel, lubricating oils with a BN of 10...20 are recommended to be
used. Lubricating oils having fresh oil BN below 15 can be used only if fuel sulphur content is
below 0.4 % mass. Also BN 30 lubricating oils stated later in this chapter can be used on MDF
operation, though not preferred in the first place.
4-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Table 4-2 Validated lubricating oils for fuel oil categories A, B and F
Supplier Brand name Viscosity BN
BP Energol HPDX 40 SAE 40 12

Energol IC-HFX 204 SAE 40 20
Castrol HLX 40 SAE 40 12
MHP 154 SAE 40 15
Seamax Extra 40 SAE 40 15
TLX Plus 204 SAE 40 20
Chevron (Texaco + Caltex) Delo 1000 Marine 40 SAE 40 12
Taro 12 XD 40 SAE 40 12
Taro 20 DP 40 SAE 40 20
Taro 20 DP 40X SAE 40 20
Conqord Oil Q8 Marine D 1000 SAE 40 SAE 40 12
ENI S.p.A. Cladium 140 S SAE 40 14
ExxonMobil Delvac 1640 SAE 40 12

Mobilgard ADL 40 SAE 40 12
Mobilgard 412 SAE 40 15
Mobilgard 1 SHC SAE 40 15
Indian Oil Corporation Servo Marine 1040 SAE 40 10
Servo Marine 2040 SAE 40 20
Petrobras Marbrax CCD-410-AP SAE 40 12
Marbrax CCD-415 SAE 40 15
Shell Gadinia Oil 40 SAE 40 12
Statoil MarWay 1040 SAE 40 10.6
Total / Lubmarine Disola M 4015 SAE 40 14

Disola M 4020 SAE 40 20
Validated lubricating oils for fuel category C

Validated system oils - fuel category C, recommended in the first place when operating on
HFO in order to reach full service intervals. BN 50...55 lubricating oils are preferred in the first
place.
Table 4-3 Validated lubricating oils for fuel category C.
Aegean Lubricants Co. Alfamar 440 SAE 40 40

Alfamar 450 SAE 40 50
Alfamar 455 SAE 40 55
BP Energol IC-HFX 404 SAE 40 40
Energol IC-HFX 504 SAE 40 50
Castrol TLX Plus 404 SAE 40 40
Cepsa Troncoil 4040 PLUS SAE 40 40
Troncoil 4050 PLUS SAE 40 50
Larus 4040 SAE 40 40
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 4-3

Chevron (Texaco + Caltex) Taro 40 XL 40 SAE 40 40

Taro 50 XL 40 SAE 40 50
Taro 40 XL 40X SAE 40 40
Taro 50 XL 40X SAE 40 50
Chinese Petroleum Corpora- Marilube Oil W 404 SAE 40 40
tion Marilube Oil W 504 SAE 40 50
ENI S.p.A. Cladium 400 S SAE 40 SAE 40 40
Cladium 500 S SAE 40 SAE 40 50
Cladium 550 S SAE 40 SAE 40 55
ExxonMobil Exxmar 40 TP 40 SAE 40 40
Exxmar 50 TP 40 SAE 40 50
Mobilgard M 440 SAE 40 40
Mobilgard M50 SAE 40 50
Fuchs Titan PSW 40 SAE 40 SAE 40 40
Titan PSW 55 SAE 40 SAE 40 55
Indian Oil Corporation Servo Marine K-4040 SAE 40 40
Servo Marine K-5040 SAE 40 50
Servo Marine K-5540 SAE 40 55
Lukoil Navigo TPEO 40/40 SAE 40 40
Navigo TPEO 50/40 SAE 40 50
Navigo TPEO 55/40 SAE 40 55
Morris Lubricants Aquamor 140MD SAE 40 40
Aquamor 150MD SAE 40 50
JX Nippon Oil & Energy Cor- Marine T404 SAE 40 40
poration Marine T504 SAE 40 50
Pertamina Martron 440 SAE 40 40
Martron 450 SAE 40 50
Medripal 440 SAE 40 40
Salyx 440 SAE 40 40
Salyx 450 SAE 40 50
Petrobras Marbrax CCD-440 SAE 40 40
Petron Petromar XC 4040 SAE 40 40
Petromar XC 5540 SAE 40 55
Petromar HF 4040 SAE 40 40
Petronas Lubricants Interna- Disrol 400 SAE 40 SAE 40 40
tional Disrol 500 SAE 40 SAE 40 50
MAEO 4040 SAE 40 40
MAEO 4050 SAE 40 50
Repsol YPF Neptuno W NT 4000 SAE 40 SAE 40 40
Neptuno W NT 5500 SAE 40 SAE 40 55
Saudi Arabian Lubricating Oil Petromin Petropower 3-40 SAE 40 40
Company (Petrolube) Petromin Petropower 4-40 SAE 40 55
Petromin Petroshield 3-40 SAE 40 40
Petromin Petroshield 4-40 SAE 40 55
Shell Argina X 40 SAE 40 40
Argina XL 40 SAE 40 50
SK Lubricants Supermar 40TP40 SAE 40 40
Supermar 50TP40 SAE 40 50
4-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Total / Lubmarine Aurelia TI 4040 SAE 40 40

Aurelia TI 4055 SAE 40 55
Validated lubricating oils for fuel categories A, B and C

Validated system oils - fuel oil categories A, B and C. In HFO installations BN 30 lubricants
have eventually a positive influence on cleanliness of the SCR catalyst. However, due to low
lubricating oil consumption, with BN 30 oils lubricating oil change intervals will be shorter than
with higher BN lubricating oils.
Table 4-4 Validated lubricating oils for fuel category A, B and C.
Aegean Lubricants Co. Alfamar 430 SAE 40 30
BP Energol IC-HFX 304 SAE 40 30
Castrol TLX Plus 304 SAE 40 30
Cepsa Troncoil 3040 PLUS SAE 40 30

Chevron (Texaco + Caltex) Taro 30 DP 40 SAE 40 30
Taro 30 DP 40X SAE 40 30
Chinese Petroleum Corpora- Marilube Oil W 304 SAE 40 30
tion
ENI S.p.A. Cladium 300 S SAE 40 SAE 40 30
ExxonMobil Exxmar 30 TP 40 SAE 40 30

Mobilgard M 430 SAE 40 30
Fuchs Titan PSW 30 SAE 40 SAE 40 30
Indian Oil Corporation Servo Marine K-3040 SAE 40 30
Lukoil Navigo TPEO 30/40 SAE 40 30
Morris Lubricants Aquamor 130MD SAE 40 30
JX Nippon Oil & Energy Cor- Marine T304 SAE 40 30

poration
Pertamina Martron 430 SAE 40 30
Salyx 430 SAE 40 30
Petrobras Marbrax CCD-430 SAE 40 30
Petron Petromar XC 3040 SAE 40 30

Petronas Lubricants Interna- Disrol 300 SAE 40 SAE 40 30
tional
Saudi Arabian Lubricating Oil Petromin Petropower 2-40 SAE 40 30
Company (Petrolube) Petromin Petroshield 2-40 SAE 40 30
Shell Argina T 40 SAE 40 30
SK Lubricants Supermar 30TP40 SAE 40 30
Total / Lubmarine Aurelia TI 4030 SAE 40 30
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 4-5

4.2.1.2 Approved lubricating oils for governor

An oil of viscosity class SAE 30 or SAE 40 is suitable and usually the same oil can be used as
in the engine. Turbocharger oil can also be used in the governor. In low ambient conditions it
may be necessary to use a multigrade oil (e.g. SAE 5W-40) to get a good control during
start-up.
4.2.1.3 Approved lubricating grease for starting motor
Table 4-5 Approved lubricating grease for starting motor.
Supplier Brand name
NYE Lubricants Rheolube 377AL

follow these guidelines.
4.3.1 Lubricating oil system

For engines with wet sump, the lubricating oil may be filled into the engine using a hose or an
oil can, through the crankcase cover or through the separator pipe. The system should be
arranged so that it is possible to measure the filled oil volume.
4.3.1.1 Separator unit (2N01)

Each main engine operating shall have a dedicated separator. The separator shall be
dimensioned for continuous operation.
Design data:
Separating temperature 90…95 °C
Capacity according to the formula below:
where:
Q = actual flow through the separator [l/h]
P = total engine output [kW]
n = number of through-flows of the oil volume/day (5 for engines operated on HFO)
t = Separating time/day [h]

23h for separators with total discharge, 24h for separators with partial discharge
Separator pump (2P03)

The separator pump may be directly driven by the separator or separately driven by an electric
motor. The flow shall be adapted to achieve the above mentioned optimal flow.
4-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Separator heater (2E02)

The preheater may be a steam or an electric heater. The surface temperature of the heater
coils must not exceed 150 °C in order to avoid coking of the oil.
4.3.1.2 Renovating oil tank (2T04)

For engines with wet sump the oil sump content can be drained to this tank prior to separation.
4.3.1.3 Renovated oil tank (2T05)

This tank contains renovated oil ready to be used as a replacement of the oil drained for
separation.
4.3.1.4 New oil tank (2T03)

For engines with wet sump the lubricating oil may be filled into the engine using the separator
pipe or the filling connection on the engine. The system shall be arranged so that it is possible
to measure the filled oil volume.
4.3.1.5 Stand-by (2P04)

The lubricating oil stand-by pump is normally of screw type and should be provided with an
overflow valve
Design data:
Capacity see Technical data
Max. pressure (safety valve) 800 kPa (8 bar)
Design temperature 100°C
Viscosity for dimensioning the electric 500 cSt

motor
4.3.1.6 Sludge/waste oil tank (2T06)

The sludge/waste oil tank can be used for the storage of used lubricating oil, in addition to
the sludge coming from the LO separator unit.
4.3.2 Crankcase ventilation system

The purpose of the crankcase ventilation system is to evacuate gases from the crankcase in
order to keep the pressure in the crankcase within acceptable limits. As indicated in drawing
"Recommended lubricating oil system" each engine must have its own crankcase ventilation
pipe into open air. The connection between engine and pipe is to be made flexible. The
ventilation pipe may not be combined with pipes from other engines or from oil tanks.
A condensate trap shall be fitted on the ventilation pipe within 1...2 m from the engine.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 4-7

The size of the ventilation pipe (D2) out from the condensate trap
should be bigger than the ventilation pipe (D) coming from the
engine.
For more information about ventilation pipe (D) size, see the lub-
ricating oil system drawing.
The max back-pressure must be considered when selecting the
ventilation pipe size.
The ventilation pipe should be led out of the engine room in such
a way that the risk of water condensation in the pipe is minimized.
Design data:
Flow see section "Technical data"
Back-pressure, max. see section "Technical data"
Temperature 80°C
Fig 4-1 Recommended condensate

trap design (DAAF369903)

DAAF403288 a Internal lubricating oil system .................................................... 4-9
DAAF403289 a Recommended lubricating oil system ....................................... 4-10
4-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF403288 a - Internal lubricating oil system
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 4-9

DAAF403289 a - Recommended lubricating oil system
4-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 5. Compressed Air System
5. Compressed Air System
5.1 System overview

Compressed air is used to start engines and to provide actuating energy for safety and control
devices. Compressed air is used onboard also for other purposes with different pressures.
The use of starting air supply for these other purposes is limited in the classification regulations.
To ensure the functionality of the components in the compressed air system, the compressed
air has to be free from solid particles and oil.
The design of the starting air system is partly determined by the rules of the classification
societies. Most classification societies require the total capacity to be divided over two roughly
equally sized starting air receivers and starting air compressors. The rule requirements of some
classification societies are not precise for multiple engine installations.
The lay-out of the compressed air system is shown in the drawing "recommended starting air
system". If compressed air system components are included in our scope of supply they are
listed in section "Component data, Wärtsilä scope of supply".

The engine is equipped with a pneumatic starting motor driving the engine through a gear rim
on the flywheel. The nominal starting air pressure of 3 MPa (30 bar) is reduced to 1 MPa (10
bar) with a pressure regulator mounted on the engine. The compressed air system of the
electro-pneumatic overspeed trip is connected to the starting air system. For this reason, the
air supply to the engine must not be closed during operation.
The components built on the engine are shown in the drawing "internal starting air system".

5.2.1 Starting air consumption
The starting air consumption stated in technical data is for a successful start. During a remote
start the main starting valve is kept open until the engine starts, or until the max. time for the
starting attempt has elapsed. A failed remote start can consume 2...3 times the air volume
stated in technical data. If the ship has a class notation for unattended machinery spaces,
then the starts may have to be demonstrated as remote starts, usually so that only the last
starting attempt is successful.
This must be checked, by the ship builder, with the classification society.

5.3.1 Starting air compressor unit (3N02)

The recommended size of the starting air compressor is calculated according to the following
formula:
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 5-1

5. Compressed Air System Installation Planning Instructions
where:
QC = Recommended capacity [m3/h]
VSAV = Starting air vessel volume [m3]
nSAV = Number of starting air vessels of equal size [pcs]
nC = Number of starting air compressors [pcs]
pN = Nominal pressure [bar]
t = Time for filling from atmospheric pressure to nominal pressure

[h]
At least two starting air compressors must be installed. It is recommended that the compressors
are capable of filling the starting air receiver from minimum to maximum pressure in 15...30
minutes. For exact determination of the minimum capacity, the rules of the classification
societies must be followed.
5.3.1.1 Separator (3S01)

An oil and water separator should always be installed in the pipe between the compressor
and the air vessel. Depending on the operating conditions of the installation, an oil and water
separator may be needed in the pipe between the air vessel and engine. The starting air pipes
should always be drawn with slope and be arranged with manual or automatic draining at the
lowest points.

5.4.1 Starting air vessel (3T01)
Quantity ........................................ 2pcs 600L
Type .............................................. 600 L / DN50
Volume, nominal (m³) .................... 0.600
Connection, safety valve (DN) ...... 50
Discharge pressure (kPa) .............. 3000
Dimensional drawing 710L ........... DBAE503933
Instrument ..................................... Pressure gauge, glycerine-filled, 63 mm 0 - 40 bar
Drain ............................................. Automatic drain
Mounting ....................................... Horizontal mounting
5.4.2 Starting air vessel Aux

Quantity ........................................ 1pc 500L
Type .............................................. 500 L / DN38
Volume, nominal (m³) .................... 0.5
Connection, safety valve (DN) ...... 38
Discharge pressure (kPa) .............. 3000
Dimensional drawing 500L ........... Ag_0976-1-0
5-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

5.4.3 Air filter (starting air inlet) (3F02)

Quantity ........................................ 2

DAAF403290 - Internal starting air system ......................................................... 5-4
DAAF403291 - Recommended starting air system ............................................ 5-5
DBAE503933 - 3T01 - Starting air vessel, dimensional drawing ........................ 5-6
Ag_0976-1-0 - 3T01 - Starting air vessel aux, dimensional drawing ................. 5-7
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 5-3

DAAF403290 - - Internal starting air system
5-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF403291 - - Recommended starting air system
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 5-5

DBAE503933 - - 3T01 - Starting air vessel, dimensional drawing
5-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Ag_0976-1-0 - - 3T01 - Starting air vessel aux, dimensional
drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 5-7

Installation Planning Instructions 6. Cooling Water System
6. Cooling Water System
6.1 System overview

Only treated fresh water containing approved corrosion inhibitors may be circulated through
the engines. It is important that water of acceptable quality and approved corrosion inhibitors
are used directly when the system is filled after completed installation.
To allow start on heavy fuel, the cooling water system has to be preheated to a temperature
as near to the operating temperature as possible.
The lay-out of the cooling water system is shown in the drawing "recommended cooling water
system". If cooling water components are included in our scope of supply they are listed in
section "Component data, Wärtsilä scope of supply".

The cooling water system consists of a high temperature (HT) and a low temperature (LT)
circuit, both cooled by treated fresh water. The HT-circuit is cooling the jackets and cylinder
heads and the LT-circuit is cooling the charge air and lubricating oil.
● engine driven HT circulating pump with non-return valve
● stand-by pump connection for the HT engine driven circulating pump
● HT thermostatic valve of self actuating type for controlling the outlet temperature from the
engine
● charge air cooler
● engine driven LT circulating pump
● stand-by pump connection for the LT engine driven circulating pump
The arrangement of the built-on system is shown in the drawing "internal system".

6.2.1 Raw water quality
Raw water quality to be used in the closed cooling water circuits of engines has to meet the
following specification.
Table 6-1 Raw water specification
Property Unit Limit Test method ref.
pH 1) 6.5...8.5 ASTM D 1287 or D 1293
Hardness, max. °dH 10 ASTM D 1126
Chlorides, max mg/l 80 ASTM D 512 or D 4327
Sulphates, max. mg/l 150 ASTM D 516 or D 4327
Use of raw water produced with an evaporator as well as a good quality tap water will normally
ensure that an acceptable raw water quality requirement is fulfilled, but e.g. sea water and
rain water are unsuitable raw water qualities.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 6-1

6. Cooling Water System Installation Planning Instructions
1)
If a Reverse Osmosis (RO) process is used, min. limit for pH is 6.0 based on the RO process
operational principle. The use of water originating from RO process further presumes that a
max. content of 80 mg/l for chloride content is achieved.
6.2.2 Cooling water treatment

Table 6-2 Approved cooling water treatment products
Product Additive type Supplier
Cool Treat NCLT (ex-Vecom Sodium nitrite + borate Vecom Marine Alliance B.V.
CWT Diesel QC-2) Mozartlaan 3
3144 AA Maassluis
The Netherlands
CorrShield NT 4293 Sodium nitrite + borate GE Water and Process Technologies
CorrShield NT 4200 Sodium nitrite + borate Interleuvenlaan 25
B-3001 Heverlee, Belgium
GE Water and Process Technologies

4636 Somerton Road
Trevose, PA 19053, United States
Diaprosim RD11 (RD11M) Sodium nitrite Alm International S.A
76 rue du Bourg Voisin
21140 Semur En Auxois, France
DEWT-NC powder Sodium nitrite + borate Ashland Specialty Chemical
Liquidewt Sodium nitrite + borate Drew Marine
Maxigard Sodium nitrite + borate One Drew Plaza
Boonton, NJ 07005, USA
Dieselguard NB Sodium nitrite + borate Wilhelmsen Chemicals AS
Rocor NB liquid Sodium nitrite + borate P.O. Box 15
Cooltreat AL Organic Acid Technology N-3141 Kjøpmannskjær
Engine Water Treatment 9- Sodium nitrite + borate Norway
108 Sodium nitrite + borate (ex. Unitor & Nalfleet)
Nalcool 2000
Drewgard 4109 Sodium nitrite + borate Ashland Specialty Chemical
Drew Industrial
One Drew Plaza
Boonton, NJ 07005, USA
Havoline XLi Organic acid technology S.A. Arteco N.V.
Technologiepark-Zwijnaarde 2
B-9052 Ghent/Zwijnaarde, Belgium
Chevron Global Lubricants

6101 Bollinger Canyon Road
San Ramon, CA 94583
Korrostop KV Sodium molybdate Suomen KL-Lämpö Oy
Keisarinviitta 22
33960, Pirkkala, Finland
Marisol CW Sodium nitrite + borate Maritech AB
Box 143
S-29122 Kristianstad, Sweden
Pekar J Organic acid technology Korves Oy
Seenintie 8
40320 Jyväskylä, Finland
6-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Product Additive type Supplier
Q8 Corrosion Inhibitor Long- Organic acid technology Kuwait Petroleum (Danmark) AS

Life Hummetoftveij 49
DK-2830 Virum, Denmark
Caretreat 2 Diesel Sodium nitrite + borate Marine Care B.V.
Mozartlaan 3
3144 NA Maasssluis
The Netherlands
Trac 102 Sodium nitrite + borate Nalco Chemical Company
One Nalco Centre
Naperville, Illinois
60566-1024 USA
WT Supra Organic acid technology Total
Diamant B, 16, rue de la République
92922 Paris La Défense Cedex, France
In order to prevent corrosion in the cooling water system, the instructions of right dosage and
concentration of active corrosion inhibitors should always be followed. The information can
be found in the table below.
Table 6-3 Dosage instructions
Product designation Dosage per 1 m³ Concentration of active corrosion inhibitor

of system capa-
city
Caretreat 2 Diesel 6...10 litres 1500...2500 ppm as NO2
Cooltreat 651 5 litres 800 ppm as NO2
Cooltreat NCLT (ex-Vecom 6...10 litres 1500...2500 ppm as NO2

CWT Diesel QC-2)
Corrshield NT 4293 10 litres 670...1000 ppm as NO2
CorrShield NT 4200
DEWT-NC powder 3...4.5 kg 1500...2250 ppm as NO2
Drewgard 4109 16...30 litres 640...1200 ppm as NO2
Liquidewt 8...12 litres 470...700 ppm as NO2
Maxigard 16...30 litres 640...1200 ppm as NO2
Diaprosim RD11 (RD11M) 5 kg 1250 ppm as NO2
Dieselguard NB 2.0...4.8 kg 1000...2400 ppm as NO2

Rocor NB Liquid 9.5...24 litres 1000...2400 ppm as NO2
Cooltreat AL 50...100 litres 1.8...3.7 Brix° of active compounds measured with
a supplier’s refractometer
Engine water treatment 9-108 2.25...3.4 litres 670...1000 ppm as NO2
Nalcool 2000 32...48 litres 1000...1500 ppm as NO2
Havoline XLi 50...100 litres 1.8...3.7 Brix° of active compounds measured with
Korrostop KV 20...25 litres 120...150 ppm as Mo
Maricol CW 6...9 litres 1000...1500 ppm as NO2
Pekar J 20 litres 30 ppm as Mo
Q8 Corrosion Inhibitor Long- 50...100 litres 1.8...3.7 Brix° of active compounds measured with
Life a supplier’s refractometer
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 6-3

Product designation Dosage per 1 m³ Concentration of active corrosion inhibitor

of system capa-
city
WT Supra 50...100 litres 1.8...3.7 Brix° of active compounds measured with
Note 1 For many products the recommended minimum and maximum limits are listed in the table
above. Since the amount of active corrosion inhibitors, especially nitrites, is decreasing
during the service of engines, the engine manufacturer recommends to start the dosage
from the upper level of indicated range.
Note 2 The nitrite content of nitrite-based cooling water additives tends to decrease in use. The
risk of local corrosion increases substantially when nitrite content goes below the recom-
mended limit.
Note 3 Cooling water additive manufacturers can indicate the required nitrite content measured
either as sodium nitrite, NaNO2 or as nitrite, NO2. 1 mg/l as NO2 equals to 1.5 mg/l as
NaNO2.
Note 4 Nitrite based cooling water additives are not offering a good protection against corrosion
for aluminium and its alloys and thus the use of such products can’t recommended for
cooling systems containing those construction materials.
6.2.2.1 Glycol
Use of glycol in the cooling water is not recommended unless it is absolutely necessary.
Starting from 20% glycol the engine is to be de-rated 0.23 % per 1% glycol in the water. Max.
50% glycol is permitted.
Corrosion inhibitors shall be used regardless of glycol in the cooling water.

6.3.1 Central cooler (4E08)

The fresh water cooler can be of either tube or plate type. Due to the smaller dimensions the
plate cooler is normally used. The fresh water cooler can be common for several engines, also
one independent cooler per engine is used.
Design data:
Heat to be dissipated/engine see "Technical data" and drawing "Recommended cooling water
system"
Fresh water flow/engine see "Technical data" and drawing "Recommended cooling water
system"
Pressure drop on the FW side, max. 60 kPa (0.6 bar)
FW temp. after cooler, max 38 °C
Sea water flow acc. to makers standard, normally 1.2...1.5 x FW flow
Pressure drop on the SW side, norm 80...140 kPa (0.8...1.4 bar)
Margin for fouling and safety, min 15%
6-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

6.3.2 Expansion tank (4T05)

The expansion tank compensates for thermal expansion of the coolant, serves for venting of
the circuits and provides a sufficient static pressure for the circulating pumps.
Design data:
Pressure from the expansion tank at 70 - 150 kPa (0.7...1.5 bar)

pump inlet
Volume min. 10% of the system, however min.
100 l.
Concerning the water volume in the engine, see Technical data.

The expansion tank should be equipped with an inspection hatch, a level gauge, a low level
alarm and necessary means for dosing of cooling water additives.
The vent pipes should enter in the top of the tank and continue below the water level. The
vent pipes must be drawn separately to the tank (see section Air venting and air separator
(4S01)) and the pipes should be provided with labels at the expansion tank.
The balance pipe down from the expansion tank must be dimensioned for a flow velocity not
exceeding 1.0...1.5 m/s in order to ensure the required pressure at the pump inlet with engines
running. The flow through the pipe depends on the number of vent pipes to the tank and the
size of the orifices in the vent pipes. The table below can be used for guidance
Table 6-4 Minimum diameter of balance pipe
Nominal pipe size Max. flow velocity Max. number of

(m/s) vent pipes with ø5
mm orifice
DN 32 1.1 3
DN 40 1.2 6
DN 50 1.3 10
DN 65 1.4 17
DN 80 1.5 28
6.3.3 Drain tank (4T04)

It is recommended to provide a drain tank to which the engines and coolers can be drained
for maintenance so that the water and cooling water treatment can be collected and reused.
For the water volume in the engine, see the section for Technical data (HT-circuit).
Most of the cooling water in the engine can be recovered from the HT-circuit, whereas the
amount of water on the LT side is small.
Condense water drain pipes from several engines shall not be connected before drain tank
because of risk to get reverse flow into a stopped engine.
6.3.4 Air venting and air separator (4S01)

Air may be entrained in the system after an overhaul, or a leak may continuously add air or
gas into the system. The engine is equipped with vent pipes to evacuate air from the cooling
water circuits. The vent pipes should be drawn separately to the expansion tank from each
connection on the engine.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 6-5

Vent pipes to the expansion tank are to be installed at all high points in the piping system,
where air or gas can accumulate. The vent pipes must be continuously rising.
As indicated in drawing "Recommended cooling water system", it is strongly recommended
to install efficient air separators in addition to the vent pipes from the engine to ensure fast
evacuation of entrained air.
6.3.5 Orifices
An orifice must be mounted in each cooling water circuit branch to be able to correctly balance
the flow. An orifice shall also be installed in each venting pipe directed to the expansion tank.
When a thermostatic valve is used to bypass a cooler, an orifice should be mounted in the
bypass line so that the valve "sees" equal back pressures in the cooler and the bypass line.

6.4.1 Temperature control valve (heat recovery) (4V02)
Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. AKO 226G0121-100-074
Model ............................................ Direct
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 96.0
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1000.0
Pressure drop (kPa) ...................... 30.0
Connection (DN) ........................... 100
Set point (°C) ................................ 77
6.4.2 Preheating unit (4N01)

Quantity ........................................ 1
type ............................................... KVE8W-27
Heater power ................................ 27 kW
Voltage / Frequency ...................... 400V / 50Hz
6.4.3 Temperature control valve (box cooler) (4V14)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. AKO 226G0121-125-029
Model ............................................ Direct
Flow, max. (m³/h) .......................... 134
Pressure, max. (kPa) ..................... 1000.0
Pressure drop (kPa) ...................... 30.0
Connection (DN) ........................... 125
6-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018


DAAF403292 a Internal cooling water system .................................................... 6-8
DAAF403293 - Recommended cooling water system ....................................... 6-9
V60D0343 - Recommended cooling water circuit deaerator ........................ 6-10
dbae452226 - 4V14 - Temperature control valve (box cooler), dimensional
drawing ...................................................................................... 6-11
dbae452225 - 4V02- Temperature control valve (heat recovery), dimensional
drawing ...................................................................................... 6-12
33967_KVE8W-27 - Preheater 4609-WR-V 27kW ...................................................... 6-13
DBAE853716 - Preheater electrical diagram ...................................................... 6-14
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 6-7

DAAF403292 a - Internal cooling water system
6-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF403293 - - Recommended cooling water system
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 6-9

V60D0343 - - Recommended cooling water circuit deaerator
6-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

dbae452226 - - 4V14 - Temperature control valve (box cooler),
dimensional drawing
Clorius Controls Temperature Regulator without auxiliary energy 226G0121-125-GB
Clorius Controls Three-Way Temperature Regulator with

manual override Type Series 226G0121, Nominal Size DN125
125
Technical Data: Manual override for the mechanical opening of the

Material: cooling path in case of any failure of the thermostat.
- Body EN-GJS-400 This emergency manual adjustment is not to be
- Innerparts SS / Brass used for adjustment during automatic operation.
Thermostat 237.0120-xxx-0
Sealing kit NBR
Operation temperature up to 120 °C
Operation pressure up to 16 bar
adm. Differential pressure up to 16 bar
Nominal pressure PN 16
Connection Flange EN 1092-2
form B
Weight 65 kg
Deliverable temperature ranges: 237.0120-xxx-0

05 -15 °C 35 – 43 °C 57 – 66 °C 74 – 82 °C 93 -103 °C
14 – 26 °C 37 – 47 °C 60 – 69 °C 77 – 85 °C 102-113°C
20 – 30 °C 39 – 50 °C 62 – 71 °C 79 – 88 °C Dividing application
27 – 37 °C 43 – 54 °C 66 – 74 °C 82 – 93 °C
29 – 40 °C 51 – 60 °C 68 – 78 °C 85 – 96 °C
32 – 41 °C 54 – 63 °C 71 – 79 °C 88 – 99 °C
Installation:
The installation can be done selectively as follows:
as divider as mixing valve
path A: from motor path C: from cooler
path B: to bypass path B: from bypass
path C: to cooler path A: to motor
The paths have been marked on the connections.
The temperature regulator may be installed in all positions.
Mixing application
Clorius Controls A/S // Kajakvej 4 // DK-2770 Kastrup // Denmark

Tel.: +45 77 32 31 30 // Fax: +45 77 32 31 31 // mail@cloriuscontrols.com
www.cloriuscontrols.com
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 6-11

dbae452225 - - 4V02- Temperature control valve (heat recovery),
dimensional drawing
Clorius Controls Temperature Regulator BT 226G0121-100-GB

without auxiliary energy
Three-Way Temperature Regulator with manual override Type

Series 226G0121, Nominal Size DN 100
Technical Data Manual override for the mechanical opening of the

Material cooling path in case of any failure of the thermostat.
- Body EN GJS-400 This emergency manual adjustment is not to be
- Inner Parts SS/Ms used for adjustment during automatic operation.
Thermostat 237.0120-xxx
Sealing Kit NBR
Operation Temperature up to 120 °C
Operation Pressure up to 16 bar
adm. Differential Pressure up to 16 bar
Nominal Pressure PN 16
lieferbare Temperaturbereiche Teil-Nr. 237.0120-xxx

deliverable temperature ranges part-no. 237.0120-xxx
05 - 15 °C 37 - 47 °C 66 - 74 °C 82 - 93 °C
14 - 26 °C 39 - 50 °C 68 - 78 °C 85 - 96 °C
20 - 30 °C 43 - 54 °C 71 - 79 °C 88 - 99 °C
27 - 37 °C 51 - 60 °C 74 - 82 °C 93 - 103 °C use as divider
32 - 41 °C 57 - 66 °C 77 - 85 °C 102 - 113 °C
35 - 43 °C 62 - 71 °C 79 - 88 °C
Installation:
The installation can be done selectively as follows:
as divider as mixing valve
path A: from motor path C: from cooler
path B: to bypass path B: from bypass
path C: to cooler path A: to motor
The pathes have been marked on the connections.
The temperature regulator may be installed in all. use as mixing valve
Clorus Controls A/S - Kajakvej 4 - DK-2770 Kastrup - Denmark WWW.CLORIUSCONTROLS.COM
6-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
500 525
2 3
475
F 200 F
7.1
Erdungsbolzen optional
earthing bolt
400
4 optional
5
E E
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

optional optional
835
8 1
6 7.2
702
optional
536
292
D D
n322,5
60
175
29
6
313 700 245 4x18

1258 60 250
290
Stopfen, plug G 1 1/4" Technische Daten/ technical data:
Entschlammanschluß Typ: KVE-27
C sludge removal Wärmeleistung/ heating capacity (kW): 27 kW C
Oberflächenbelastung/ surface load (W/cm²): 6,9 W/cm²
max. zul. Betriebsdruck (bar): 10 bar
900 max.operating pressure
Ausbauraum für Heizkörper max. zul. Betriebstemperatur(°C): 95 °C
service space for heatings elements max. operating temperature
Inhalt/ volume (l): 29 l
Gewicht/ weight (kG): 103 kG
243 870 145
Pos. Bauteile / components
1 Elektrischer Durchlauferhitzer Type 4609WR /27kW
Electric continuous flow heater
2 Leistungsschaltschrank mit Temperaturregelung 3x9 kW
Power control cabinet with temperatur controler
B Einstufige Inlinepumpe / single-stage in-line pump B
3 TP40-120/2, 0,37kW, (50Hz) 11,4m³, 0,74bar
TP40-160/2, 0,75kW, (60Hz) 13,7m³, 1,18bar
4 Rückschlagklappe RK41 DN40 Non-return flap
5 Sicherheitsventil 10 bar/ safety valve optional
6 Maschinenthermometer/ thermometer optional
7 Manometer/ pressure indicator optional
8 Durchflußwächter/ flow switch optional
D-82216 Maisach b. München Allgemein- Oberfläche: Maßstab: 1:5 (1:10) Gew. 103,00 kg
ELWA Frauenstraße 26 --------
Elektrowärme Tel. 08141/22866-0, Fax.10 Toleranz
München © Email: support@elwa.com ISO 2768- cl Werkstoff: P265GH
Datum Name
Gezeichnet 08.07.2016 ac KVE8-27 Kühlwasservorwärme-Aggregat
Auslauf/ Out-flow pipe Zulauf/ Feed pipe Kontrolliert 08.07.2016 Ka
A Flansch/ flange Erdungsbolzen Flansch/ flange Norm KVE8-27 Water preheating unit A
EN 1092-1/11B1/DN40/PN40 earthing bolt EN 1092-1/11B1/DN40/PN40
Refer to protection notice ISO 16016. 1/1
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 beachten.
33967_KVE8-27
Data may vary due to further technical developement.
A2
Status Änderungen Datum Name (Ers.f:) - 09.08.2016
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6-13
33967_KVE8W-27 - - Preheater 4609-WR-V 27kW
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6-14
L1 / 11.0
L2 / 11.0
L3 / 11.0
1 3 5 13 23 1 3 5 13 23
F1 F7
36...45A 14 24 1,1...1,6A 14 24
[ turn to 1,1A/ 1,42A
max A] I> I> I> I> I> I>
12.6
12.7
11.5
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
K1 K7
12.7 2 4 6 11.6 2 4 6
DBAE853716 - - Preheater electrical diagram
PE
1 3 5
Q0
63A PE
2 4 6 PE PE
main X0
switch L1 L2 L3 16 mm² 16 mm² 16 mm² 16 mm²
BK BK BK GNYE
M40 M40(tube) M20
Power Supply U1 V1 W1 PE
X00 1 2 3 PE
L2
M
380-415V AC / 50Hz / 42A M1
L1 L3 3
380-415V 1A
440-460V AC / 60Hz / 39A 0,37kW 50Hz
E1
main fuse max. 50A 27kW 440-460V 1,42A
step PE 0,75kW 60Hz
Operatin voltage 380-415V heater 1 1
S20 S21 preheater pump

or 440-460V motor
4 2 4 2
M20(tube)
X5: 30 / 12.0
X5: 31 / 12.0
X5: 32 / 12.0
HEATER
M20(tube)
Standard cable glands:
main supply 1x M40 16-28mm, X5: 33 / 12.0
heater 1x M40 (tube), X5: 34 / 12.0
limiter 1xM20 (tube), X5: 35 / 12.0
controller 1xM20 (tube),
control 5x M20 6-13mm,
pump 1x M20 6-13mm,
4 page 1 of 6 11
Dieses Dokument ist Eigentum der ELWA. Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Dokumente, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines I nhalts sind verboten,
Date 10.02.2017 KVE8 ELWA Elektro-Wärme Supply soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet.I m übrigen gilt der Schutzvermerk nach I SO 16016.
This document is the property of ELWA. The distribution or reproduction is prohibited unless explicitly authorized. Protection notice pursuant to I SO 16016
Editor M.Holzner Heater Controlling trafag GmbH & Co. KG shall be valid.
Certif. by K.Amann 27kW Frauenstrasse 26 Project start: 05.07.2016 Page 10
Certif. dat. 30.01.2017 380-415V AC / 50Hz / 42A 440-460V AC / 60Hz / 39A D-82216 Maisach / Germany Rules: DI N EN 61439-1 34791_V0 Q:\ EPLAN_DATA\ Projekte\ ELWA_15\ KVE\ KVE-Wärtsilä Pages 21
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L1 / 10.9
L2 / 10.9 L02 / 12.0
L3 / 10.9
X1 2 4 6 L02
1 3 5 13
F0 F7
0,18...0,25A 10.7 14
[ 0,2A/ 0,18A]
I> I> I>
2 4 6
13 23
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

S10
white
0V 415V / 460V 14 24
LOC-0-REM R L
T0
63VA
PE 0V 230V
F00 L00 L01

250mAT
X1 L00 L01
11 13 11
K0 K7 K10
12.6 14 12 11.6 14 13.7 14 12
Fan Cabinet
M0
1
X1 X1 X1
M
H00 H0 H7
white red green 1~ A1
X2 X2 X2
VOLTAGE FAULT I N OPERATI ON 2 PE
SUPPLY A1
18m³ / h R
K7 C
PE
A2
PE PE A2
L00 / 12.0
X1 PE 1 3 PE 9 10 5 7 8
M20
1 2 10.7
Connection normally open
3 4 10.7
Close only if required 5 6 10.7
by local regulations 13 14 11.3
21 22
31 32
43 44 13.1
EXTERNAL CONTACT
~ 230V 5A AC-3
53 54 12.7
External shutdown
or jumper
EXTERNAL CONTACT
~ 230V 5A AC-3
10 page 2 of 6 12
Date 31.01.2017 KVE8 ELWA Elektro-Wärme Control system soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet.I m übrigen gilt der Schutzvermerk nach I SO 16016.
6-15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6-16
11.9 / L02 L02 / 13.0
53
K7
11.6 54
13 23
F1 F1
10.2 14 10.2 24
A1 A1
R
K0 K1 C
230VAC A2 230VAC A2
PE
11.9 / L00 L00 / 13.0
X5 30 31 32 33 34 35 PE
10.6 / X5: 30 14 1 2 10.2

10.6 / 11 11.2
X5: 31 12 3 4 10.2
10.6 / X5: 32 24 5 6 10.2
21 13.1
22 13 14
10.6 / X5: 33
10.6 / X5: 34
10.6 / X5: 35
11 page 3 of 6 13
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L02 / 12.9
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

L1 N
AC AC
T1
~ 230V/ = 24V
15VA
+ -
F01 L+ 1
0125mAT
21 43 33 43
K0 K7 S10 S10
12.6 24 22 11.6 44 11.6 34 11.6 44 A1
K10
24VDC A2
PE PE
L00 / 12.9
X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PE X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PE
M20 M20
14
Connection normally open 11 11.7
12
Close only if required
by local regulations
FAULT
I N OPERATI ON
REMOTE CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL
External control
ENGI NE
External control
ENGI NE
External control
ENGI NE
External control
ENGI NE
12 page 4 of 6 30
6-17
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6-18
H00 H7 S10 H0
VOLTAGE
LOC-0-REM FAULT
SUPPLY I N OPERATI ON
13 page 5 of 6 40
Date 10.02.2017 KVE8 ELWA Elektro-Wärme front view soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet.I m übrigen gilt der Schutzvermerk nach I SO 16016.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
cabinet 400x500x210mm
F1 F0 F7
T0 X1 K0 K10
F00
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

PE
L02
L00
L00
L01
Q0
X5 K1 K7
T1
F01 X1 X2 X3
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10
31 33 35
PE 1 3 5 7 9 PE 1 3 5 7 PE 1 3 5 7 9
PE 30 32 34
scale 1: 2
30 page 6 of 6 43
Date 21.03.2017 KVE8 ELWA Elektro-Wärme I nternal soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet.I m übrigen gilt der Schutzvermerk nach I SO 16016.
6-19
Installation Planning Instructions 7. Combustion Air System
7. Combustion Air System
7.1 System overview

The engine draws the combustion air from the engine room through the inlet filter fitted on the
turbocharger. The combustion air should be delivered through a dedicated duct close to the
turbocharger(s), directed towards the air intake(s). For the required amount of combustion air,
see the section for "Technical data".

7.2.1 Combustion air quality
During normal operating conditions the air temperature at the turbocharger inlet should be
kept between 15ºC and 35ºC. Max. 45ºC is allowed.

7.3.1 Engine room ventilation
Fig 7-1 Engine room ventilation, turbocharger with air filter.
To maintain acceptable operating conditions for the engines and to ensure trouble free operation
of all equipment, attention shall be paid to the engine room ventilation and the supply of
combustion air. The air intakes to the engine room must be located in a way that water spray,
rain water, dust and exhaust gases cannot enter the ventilation ducts and the engine room.
The dimensioning of blowers and extractors should ensure that an over pressure of about 5
mmWC is maintained in the engine room in all running conditions.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 7-1

7. Combustion Air System Installation Planning Instructions
For the minimum requirements concerning the engine room ventilation and more details, see
applicable standards, such as ISO 8861.
The amount of air required for ventilation is calculated from the total heat emission Φ to
evacuate. To determine Φ, all heat sources shall be considered, e.g.:
● main and auxiliary diesel engines
● exhaust gas piping
● generators
● electric appliances and lighting
● boilers
● steam and condensate piping
● tanks
● other auxiliary equipment
It is recommended to consider an outside air temperature of not less than 35°C and a
temperature rise of 11°C for the ventilation air.
The amount of air required for ventilation is then calculated from the formula:
where:
qv = Amount of ventilation air [m3/s]
Ф = total heat emission to be evacuated [kW]
ρ = density of ventilation air 1.13 kg/m3
c = Specific heat capacity of the ventilation air 1.01

kJ/kgK
ΔT = Temperature rise in engine room [°C]
The engine room ventilation has to be provided by separate ventilation fans. These fans should
preferably have two-speed electric motors (or variable speed). Thus flexible operation is
possible, e.g. in port the capacity can be reduced during overhaul of the main engine when it
is not preheated (and therefore not heating the room). The ventilation air is to be equally
distributed in the engine room considering air flows from points of delivery towards the exits.
This is usually done so that the funnel serves as an exit for the majority of the air. To avoid
stagnant air, extractors can be used. It is good practice to provide areas with significant heat
sources, such as separator rooms with their own air supply and extractors.
For very cold conditions a preheater in the system should be considered. Suitable media could
be thermal oil or water/glycol to avoid the risk for freezing. If steam is specified as a heating
system for the ship the preheater should be in a secondary circuit.
7.3.2 Combustion air for engines

The combustion air shall be supplied by separate combustion air fans, with a capacity slightly
higher than the maximum air consumption. For the required amount of combustion air, see
the section "Technical data". The combustion air mass flow stated in technical data is defined
for an ambient air temperature of 25°C. Calculate with an air density corresponding to 30°C
or more when translating the mass flow into volume flow. The expression below can be used
to calculate the volume flow.
7-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 7. Combustion Air System
where:
qc = combustion air volume flow [m³/s]
m' = combustion air mass flow [kg/s]
ρ = air density 1.15 kg/m³
The fans should preferably have a two-speed electric motors (or variable speed) for enhanced
flexibility. In multi-engine installations each main engine should preferably have its own
combustion air fan. Thus the air flow can be adapted to the number of engines in operation.
The air required for combustion is taken from the engine room through a filter fitted on the
turbocharger. This reduces the risk for too low temperatures and contamination of the
combustion air. It is imperative that the combustion air is free from sea water, dust, fumes,
etc.
With these arrangements the normally required minimum air temperature to the main engine,
see section "Recommendations for operation", can typically be maintained. For lower
temperatures special provisions are necessary.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 7-3

7. Combustion Air System Installation Planning Instructions
7.3.3 Condensation of charge air coolers

Condensed water from the charge air coolers is normally drained to the bilge. The condensation
can be estimated according to the example below.
Example, according to the diagram:
At an ambient air temperature of 35°C and a relative humidity

of 80%, the content of water in the air is 0.029 kg water/ kg
dry air. If the air manifold pressure (receiver pressure) under
these conditions is 2.5 bar (= 3.5 bar absolute), the dew point
will be 55°C. If the air temperature in the air manifold is only
45°C, the air can only contain 0.018 kg/kg. The difference,
0.011 kg/kg (0.029 - 0.018) will appear as condensed water.
Fig 7-2 Condensation in charge air coolers
7-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 8. Exhaust Gas System
8. Exhaust Gas System
8.1 System overview

Each engine should have its own exhaust pipe into open air.

The equipment built on the engine is shown in the drawing "internal charge air & exhaust gas
system".
8.2 Recommendations and design data

8.2.1 Exhaust gas piping
The piping should be as short and straight as possible. Pipe bends and expansions should
be smooth to minimize the back pressure, the max. back pressure is stated in section "Technical
data". The diameter of the exhaust pipe should be increased directly after the bellows on the
turbocharger. Pipe bends should be made with the largest possible bending radius; the bending
radius should not be smaller than 1.5 x D.
The recommended flow velocity in the pipe is maximum 35…40 m/s at full output. If there are
many resistance factors in the piping, or the pipe is very long, then the flow velocity needs to
be lower. The exhaust gas mass flow given in the section for Technical data can be translated
to velocity using the formula:
where:
v = gas velocity [m/s]
m' = exhaust gas mass flow [kg/s]
T = exhaust gas temperature [°C]
D = exhaust gas pipe diameter [m]
Each exhaust pipe should be provided with a connection for measurement of the back pressure.
The connection must be accessible outside the insulation. The recommended location of the
connection is close to the engine, but not closer than 3...5 pipe diameters from the transition
to larger pipe diameter after the bellows on the turbocharger. Neither should the connection
be closer than 3...4 pipe diameters after a 90 degree pipe bend. In cases where the
recommended location is impossible, make the connection as close as possible to the
recommended location. The connection should be installed while the exhaust gas outlet on
the turbocharger is protected with a cover.
The exhaust gas pipe should be provided with water separating pockets and drainage.
The exhaust pipe must be insulated with insulation material approved for concerned operation
conditions, minimum thickness 30 mm considering the shape of engine mounted insulation.
Insulation has to be continuous and protected by a covering plate or similar to keep the
insulation intact.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-1

8. Exhaust Gas System Installation Planning Instructions
Closest to the turbocharger the insulation should consist of a hook on padding to facilitate
maintenance. It is especially important to prevent the airstream to the turbocharger from
detaching insulation, which will clog the filters.
After the insulation work has been finished, it has to be verified that it fulfils SOLAS-regulations.
Surface temperatures must be below 220°C on whole engine operating range.
8.2.2 Sampling port for gaseous emissions

If exhaust gas emissions are to be analyzed the sampling probes shall be fitted at least 10
pipe diamenters after the last exhaust gas aftertreatment device. If no exhaust gas
aftertreatment device is used, the probes should be at least 0,5 meters or 3 pipe diameters
(whichever is greater) upstream of the exit of the exhaust gas system. It is recommended to
have a 0,5" sampling port with a threaded plug sticking out from the insulation (with threads
on the outside of the pipe).
8.2.3 Supporting
It is very important that the exhaust pipe is properly fixed to a support rigid in all directions
directly after the bellows on the turbocharger. The bellows on the turbocharger may not be
used to absorb thermal expansion from the exhaust pipe. The first fixing point must direct the
thermal expansion away from the engine and be located max. 3 diameters (bellows) away
from the bellows on the turbocharger. There should be a fixing point on both sides of the pipe
at the support. Absolutely rigid mounting between the pipe and the support is recommended
at the first fixing point after the turbocharger. Resilient mounts can be accepted for resiliently
mounted engines with long bellows, provided that the mounts are self-captive; maximum
deflection at total failure being less than 2 mm radial and 4 mm axial with regards to the
bellows. The natural frequencies of the mounting should be on a safe distance from the running
speed, the firing frequency of the engine and the blade passing frequency of the propeller.
The resilient mounts can be rubber mounts of conical type, or high damping stainless steel
wire pads. Adequate thermal insulation must be provided to protect rubber mounts from high
temperatures. When using resilient mounting, the alignment of the exhaust bellows must be
checked on a regular basis and corrected when necessary.
After the first fixing point resilient mounts are recommended. The mounting supports should
be positioned at stiffened locations within the ship’s structure, e.g. decklevels, framewebs or
specially constructed supports.
The supporting must allow thermal expansion and ship’s structural deflections.
8.2.4 Back pressure

The back pressure in the system must be calculated by the shipyard based on the actual
piping design and the resistance of the components in the exhaust system. The exhaust gas
mass flow and temperature given in section "Technical data" may be used for the calculation.
The back pressure must be measured by the shipyard during the sea trial. The measurement
can be done according to the following arrangement.
8-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Fig 8-1 Exhaust gas back pressure measurement
8.2.5 Exhaust gas bellows (5H01)

Bellows must be used in the exhaust gas piping where thermal expansion or ship’s structural
deflections have to be segregated. The flexible exhaust gas bellows mounted directly on the
turbocharger outlet serves to minimise the external forces on the turbocharger and thus prevent
vibrations and possible damage. All exhaust gas bellows must be of an approved type.
8.2.6 Selective Catalytic Reduction (11N03)

If SCRs will be installed, the exhaust gas piping must be straight at least 3...5 meters in front
of the SCR. If both an exhaust gas boiler and a SCR unit will be installed, then the exhaust
gas boiler shall be installed after the SCR. Arrangements must be made so that when cleaning
the exhaust gas boiler with water, the cleaning water cannot spill down into the SCR.
8.2.7 Exhaust gas silencer (5R02)

Yard/designer should take into account that unfavorable layout of the exhaust system (length
of straight parts in the exhaust system) might cause amplification of the exhaust noise between
engine outlet and the silencer. Hence the attenuation of the silencer does not give any absolute
guarantee for the noise level after the silencer.
8.2.8 Exhaust gas boiler

If exhaust gas boilers will be installed, each engine should have a separate exhaust gas boiler.
Alternatively, a common boiler with separate gas sections for each engine is acceptable.
For dimensioning the boiler, the exhaust gas quantities and temperatures given in section
"Technical data" may be used.
8.3 Installation instructions

8.3.1 Exhaust gas bellow (5H01)
The exhaust gas bellow shall be installed directly on the turbocharger outlet, to compensate
for thermal expansion and prevent damages to the turbocharger due to vibrations.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-3

Fig 8-2 Overview of the exhaust gas pipe installation.
Dimension A in the figure above is stated in the engine drawing.

Installation procedure:
1 The engine or generating set should be installed in its final position before any external
pipes are connected.
2 Remove the protective cover from the exhaust gas outlet on the turbocharger. Be
careful that no dirt drops into the turbocharger.
3 Check the flow direction from the dimensional drawing of the bellows and install it
on the turbocharger, using the correct gasket between the flanges. Lubricate the
threads of the screws with heat resistant grease and tighten in a diagonal sequence.
NOTE
Do not remove the supports between the flanges of the bellows, until the
installation procedure has been completed and the exhaust pipe has been
rigidly fixed. Should the supports (for transport) have been removed, then
prepare and install new supports so that the bellows is stretched about 3 mm
during installation.
4 Make a temporary protection cover and place it between the bellows flange and the
smaller flange of the connection piece. The thickness of the cover should be equal
to the thickness of the gasket, which will be installed between the flanges later.
Preferably make the cover slightly larger than the flange diameter.
5 Install the connection piece on the bellows with the protection cover between the
flanges. Connect the flanges temporarily with a number of screws. Use a sufficient
number of screws to ensure that the flanges are pulled together properly. If the bellows
is aligned in a horizontal or tilted position, temporary supporting of the connection
piece and the bellows is needed during the installation.
6 Mount the counter flange to the larger flange of the connection piece, using the
correct gasket between the flanges. Use a sufficient number of screws to ensure that
the flanges are pulled together properly.
7 Align the exhaust gas pipe to the counter flange. Do not force the connection piece
in any direction.
8-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

NOTE
The exhaust gas outlet of a flexibly mounted engine will usually be displaced
due to the torque reaction as the load increases. In some cases it is necessary
to compensate for the torque reaction by installing the exhaust gas pipe with
an initial lateral offset. Thus, if the engine is flexibly mounted, Wärtsilä should
be contacted for further instructions.
In the case of a flexibly mounted generating set, which has a common base
plate, there is no lateral displacement due to the torque reaction.
8 Anchor the exhaust gas pipe to the ship structure as close as possible to the flange
of the connection piece. The supports must be made very rigid in order to prevent
vibration and movement of the exhaust gas pipe.
9 Weld the counter flange to the exhaust gas pipe.
10 Remove the connection piece and clean the exhaust gas pipe from slag and particles
developed during the welding. Remember to keep the entry into the turbocharger
covered.
11 Remove the protection cover and install the connection piece with the appropriate
gaskets.
12 Remove the temporary supports between the flanges of the flexible bellows.
13 Lubricate the threads of all screws with heat resistant grease and tighten in a diagonal
sequence.
Refer to the drawing "exhaust gas bellows" drawing for dimensions and flow direction.
Fig 8-3 Installation tolerances for exhaust gas bellows
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-5

8.3.2 Charge air wastegate connection

The engine is equipped with an air wastegate to limit the charge air pressure at high load. The
wastegate is either fully open or closed and the excess air is discharged into the engine room.
If desired, the air outlet can be moved to a another location (e.g. under floor plates) by
connecting a hose or pipe to connection 611 on the engine. The maximum length of the
pipe/hose is 3 m, unless the diameter is substantially increased.
The wastegate can be open above 80...90% load depending on intake air temperature.

8.4.1 Turbocharger cleaning device (5Z03)
Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. Dosing unit
8.4.2 Connection piece (5Z01)

Quantity ........................................ 1
Type .............................................. Adapter piece
Dimension (DN) ............................. 400
Connection, outlet (DN) ................ 250
Turbocharger type ........................ TPS52
Dimensional drawing .................... 3V60A4898
8.4.3 Exhaust gas bellows (5H01)

Quantity ........................................ 2
Type .............................................. Double
Lenght, installation (mm) .............. 420.0
Connection (DN) ........................... 250
Counter flanges ............................ With
Dimensional drawing .................... DAAB761847
8.4.4 Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor (5R02)

Quantity ........................................ 2 (1+1)
Type .............................................. MS-PAEXG-WSA NS 400 35dB(A) and MS-CCPAEXGH-WSA N400

35dB(A)
Connection (DN) ........................... 400
Attenuation (dB(A)) ........................ 35
Mounting bracket ......................... Without
8-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Dimensional drawing .................... 3ES2404-3B and 3E12224C
Installation instruction ................... 4ES0061

DAAF403295 - Internal charge air and exhaust gas system .............................. 8-8
3ES2404-3B 5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor, dimensional
drawing ...................................................................................... 8-9
DBAE706077 b Horizontal silencer 3E12224B .................................................... 8-10
4ES0061 5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor, installation
instruction .................................................................................. 8-11
3V37L0587 a 5Z03 - Turbocharger cleaning device, dimensional drawing ..... 8-17
3V60A4898 - 5Z01 - Connection piece, dimensional drawing ........................ 8-18
DAAB761847 e 5H01 - Exhaust gas bellows, dimensional drawing ................... 8-19
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-7

DAAF403295 - - Internal charge air and exhaust gas system
8-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Dimensions in SI-units
Pos Nominal size Lenght Weight Diam. Drain Drain
Item NS L kg D G F A E C R1 R2
1 300 3530 455 860 580 305 155 90 1250 NS25 NS80 (3")
2 350 3780 580 950 590 346 155 90 1405 NS25 NS80 (3")
3 400 4280 710 1060 680 420 155 90 1500 NS25 NS80 (3")
4 450 4280 855 1200 780 470 200 90 1700 NS25 NS80 (3")
5 500 4280 860 1200 780 470 200 90 1700 NS25 NS80 (3")
6 600 5260 1310 1300 910 635 225 150 2070 NS32 NS80 (3")
7 700 6050 1910 1500 1020 745 310 175 2260 NS32 NS80 (3")
8 800 6340 2490 1700 1130 840 240 130 2000 NS32 NS80 (3")
9 900 6870 2900 1800 1190 860 260 150 2240 NS32 NS80 (3")
10 1000 7620 3730 1900 1280 870 290 150 2340 NS32 NS150
11 1100 8200 4640 2100 1340 900 280 150 2600 NS32 NS150
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

12 1200 9000 5280 2100 1340 900 280 160 2650 NS32 NS150
13 1300 9500 6360 2300 1440 950 300 160 2650 NS32 NS150
14 1400 10165 7120 2400 1490 950 300 160 2680 NS32 NS150
15 1500 10165 7650 2500 1540 1000 300 160 2680 NS32 NS150
Technical data
Silencer type: Reactive and absorption model with spark arrestor
Material: Structure steel S235 ( Fe37B) EN10025
(Cor-ten B on request)
Flanges: DIN 2501. Note! NS1300, NS1500 acc. to DIN86044
Note! NS1100 not acc. to DIN2501
Drains: DIN 2986
Welding class: D ( SFS-EN 25817 )
Mounting: Vertical
Surface treatment: Ground painting, primer 25 µm

Cor-Ten steel no painting
8-9
3ES2404-3B - 5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor,
8. Exhaust Gas System
dimensional drawing
DBAE706077 b - Horizontal silencer 3E12224B
8-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

4ES0061 - 5R02 - Exhaust gas silencer with spark arrestor,
installation instruction
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-11

8-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-13

8-14 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-15

8-16 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

3V37L0587 a - 5Z03 - Turbocharger cleaning device,
dimensional drawing
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-17

3V60A4898 - - 5Z01 - Connection piece, dimensional drawing
8-18 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAB761847 e - 5H01 - Exhaust gas bellows, dimensional
drawing
LATERAL
N/mm
50
SPRING RATE
AXIAL
N/mm
42
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 8-19

Installation Planning Instructions 9. Piping Arrangements
9. Piping Arrangements
Fuel, lubricating oil, fresh water and compressed air piping is usually made in seamless carbon
steel (DIN 2448) and seamless precision tubes in carbon or stainless steel (DIN 2391), exhaust
gas piping in welded pipes of corten or carbon steel (DIN 2458). Sea-water piping should be
in Cunifer or hot dip galvanized steel.
NOTE
The pipes in the freshwater side of the cooling water system must not be galvanized!
Attention must be paid to fire risk aspects. Fuel supply and return lines shall be designed so
that they can be fitted without tension. Flexible hoses must have an approval from the
classification society. If flexible hoses are used in the compressed air system, a purge valve
shall be fitted in front of the hose(s).
It is recommended to make a fitting order plan prior to construction.
The following aspects shall be taken into consideration:
● Pockets shall be avoided. When not possible, drain plugs and air vents shall be installed
● Leak fuel drain pipes shall have continuous slope
● Vent pipes shall be continuously rising
● Flanged connections shall be used, cutting ring joints for precision tubes
Maintenance access and dismounting space of valves, coolers and other devices shall be
taken into consideration. Flange connections and other joints shall be located so that
dismounting of the equipment can be made with reasonable effort.
9.1 Pipe dimensions

When selecting the pipe dimensions, take into account:
● The pipe material and its resistance to corrosion/erosion.
● Allowed pressure loss in the circuit vs delivery head of the pump.
● Required net positive suction head (NPSH) for pumps (suction lines).
● In small pipe sizes the max acceptable velocity is usually somewhat lower than in large
pipes of equal length.
● The flow velocity should not be below 1 m/s in sea water piping due to increased risk of
fouling and pitting.
● In open circuits the velocity in the suction pipe is typically about 2/3 of the velocity in the
delivery pipe.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 9-1

9. Piping Arrangements Installation Planning Instructions
Table 9-1 Recommended maximum velocities on pump delivery side for guidance
Piping Pipe material Max velocity [m/s]
Fuel oil piping (MDF and HFO) Black steel 1.0
Lubricating oil piping Black steel 1.5
Fresh water piping Black steel 2.5
Sea water piping Galvanized steel 2.5
Aluminum brass 2.5
10/90 copper-nickel-iron 3.0
70/30 copper-nickel 4.5
Rubber lined pipes 4.5
NOTE
The diameter of gas fuel piping depends only on the allowed pressure loss in the
piping, which has to be calculated project specifically.
Compressed air pipe sizing has to be calculated project specifically. The pipe sizes may be
chosen on the basis of air velocity or pressure drop. In each pipeline case it is advised to
check the pipe sizes using both methods, this to ensure that the alternative limits are not being
exceeded.
Pipeline sizing on air velocity: For dry air, practical experience shows that reasonable
velocities are 25...30 m/s, but these should be regarded as the maximum above which noise
and erosion will take place, particularly if air is not dry. Even these velocities can be high in
terms of their effect on pressure drop. In longer supply lines, it is often necessary to restrict
velocities to 15 m/s to limit the pressure drop.
Pipeline sizing on pressure drop: As a rule of thumb the pressure drop from the starting air
vessel to the inlet of the engine should be max. 0.1 MPa (1 bar) when the bottle pressure is 3
MPa (30 bar).
It is essential that the instrument air pressure, feeding to some critical control instrumentation,
is not allowed to fall below the nominal pressure stated in chapter "Compressed air system"
due to pressure drop in the pipeline.
9.2 Trace heating

The following pipes shall be equipped with trace heating (steam, thermal oil or electrical). It
shall be possible to shut off the trace heating.
● All heavy fuel pipes
● All leak fuel and filter flushing pipes carrying heavy fuel
9.3 Pressure class

The pressure class of the piping should be higher than or equal to the design pressure, which
should be higher than or equal to the highest operating (working) pressure. The highest
operating (working) pressure is equal to the setting of the safety valve in a system.
The pressure in the system can:
● Originate from a positive displacement pump
9-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

● Be a combination of the static pressure and the pressure on the highest point of the pump
curve for a centrifugal pump
● Rise in an isolated system if the liquid is heated
Within this publication there are tables attached to drawings, which specify pressure classes
of connections. The pressure class of a connection can be higher than the pressure class
required for the pipe.
Example 1:
The fuel pressure before the engine should be 0.7 MPa (7 bar). The safety filter in dirty condition
may cause a pressure loss of 0.1 MPa (1.0 bar). The viscosimeter, automatic filter, preheater
and piping may cause a pressure loss of 0.25 MPa (2.5 bar). Consequently the discharge
pressure of the circulating pumps may rise to 1.05 MPa (10.5 bar), and the safety valve of the
pump shall thus be adjusted e.g. to 1.2 MPa (12 bar).
● A design pressure of not less than 1.2 MPa (12 bar) has to be selected.
● The nearest pipe class to be selected is PN16.
● Piping test pressure is normally 1.5 x the design pressure = 1.8 MPa (18 bar).
Example 2:
The pressure on the suction side of the cooling water pump is 0.1 MPa (1 bar). The delivery
head of the pump is 0.3 MPa (3 bar), leading to a discharge pressure of 0.4 MPa (4 bar). The
highest point of the pump curve (at or near zero flow) is 0.1 MPa (1 bar) higher than the nominal
point, and consequently the discharge pressure may rise to 0.5 MPa (5 bar) (with closed or
throttled valves).
● Consequently a design pressure of not less than 0.5 MPa (5 bar) shall be selected.
● The nearest pipe class to be selected is PN6.
● Piping test pressure is normally 1.5 x the design pressure = 0.75 MPa (7.5 bar).
Standard pressure classes are PN4, PN6, PN10, PN16, PN25, PN40, etc.
9.4 Pipe class

Classification societies categorize piping systems in different classes (DNV) or groups (ABS)
depending on pressure, temperature and media. The pipe class can determine:
● Type of connections to be used
● Heat treatment
● Welding procedure
● Test method
Systems with high design pressures and temperatures and hazardous media belong to class
I (or group I), others to II or III as applicable. Quality requirements are highest on class I.
Examples of classes of piping systems as per DNV rules are presented in the table below.
Table 9-2 Classes of piping systems as per DNV rules
Media Class I Class II Class III
MPa (bar) °C MPa (bar) °C MPa (bar) °C
Steam > 1.6 (16) or > 300 < 1.6 (16) and < 300 < 0.7 (7) and < 170
Flammable fluid > 1.6 (16) or > 150 < 1.6 (16) and < 150 < 0.7 (7) and < 60
Other media > 4 (40) or > 300 < 4 (40) and < 300 < 1.6 (16) and < 200
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 9-3

9.5 Insulation
The following pipes shall be insulated:
● All trace heated pipes
● Exhaust gas pipes
● Exposed parts of pipes with temperature > 60°C
Insulation is also recommended for:
● Pipes between engine or system oil tank and lubricating oil separator
● Pipes between engine and jacket water preheater
9.6 Local gauges

Local thermometers should be installed wherever a new temperature occurs, i.e. before and
after heat exchangers, etc.
Pressure gauges should be installed on the suction and discharge side of each pump.
9.7 Cleaning procedures

Instructions shall be given at an early stage to manufacturers and fitters how different piping
systems shall be treated, cleaned and protected.
9.7.1 Cleanliness during pipe installation

All piping must be verified to be clean before lifting it onboard for installation. During the
construction time uncompleted piping systems shall be maintained clean. Open pipe ends
should be temporarily closed. Possible debris shall be removed with a suitable method. All
tanks must be inspected and found clean before filling up with fuel, oil or water.
Piping cleaning methods are summarised in table below:
Table 9-3 Pipe cleaning
System Methods
Fuel oil A,B,C,D,F
Lubricating oil A,B,C,D,F
Starting air A,B,C
Cooling water A,B,C
Exhaust gas A,B,C
Charge air A,B,C
1) In case of carbon steel pipes
Methods applied during prefabrication of pipe spools
A = Washing with alkaline solution in hot water at 80°C for degreasing (only if pipes have been greased)
B = Removal of rust and scale with steel brush (not required for seamless precision tubes)
D = Pickling (not required for seamless precision tubes)
Methods applied after installation onboard
9-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

C = Purging with compressed air
F = Flushing
9.7.2 Pickling
Prefabricated pipe spools are pickled before installation onboard.
Pipes are pickled in an acid solution of 10% hydrochloric acid and 10% formaline inhibitor for
4-5 hours, rinsed with hot water and blown dry with compressed air.
After acid treatment the pipes are treated with a neutralizing solution of 10% caustic soda
and 50 grams of trisodiumphosphate per litre of water for 20 minutes at 40...50°C, rinsed with
hot water and blown dry with compressed air.
Great cleanliness shall be approved in all work phases after completed pickling.
9.8 Flexible pipe connections

Pressurized flexible connections carrying flammable fluids or compressed air have to be type
approved.
Great care must be taken to ensure proper installation of flexible pipe connections between
resiliently mounted engines and ship’s piping.
● Flexible pipe connections must not be twisted
● Installation length of flexible pipe connections must be correct
● Minimum bending radius must be respected
● Piping must be concentrically aligned
● When specified the flow direction must be observed
● Mating flanges shall be clean from rust, burrs and anticorrosion coatings
● Bolts are to be tightened crosswise in several stages
● Flexible elements must not be painted
● Rubber bellows must be kept clean from oil and fuel
● The piping must be rigidly supported close to the flexible piping connections.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 9-5

Fig 9-1 Flexible hoses
9.9 Installing flexible pipe connections

9.9.1 General
The engine shall be installed in its final position before any external pipe is connected to the
engine.
Different types of loads that should be observed when designing pipes and pipe supports are:
pressure inside pipe, own weight and fluid weight, thermal expansion, pressure shocks,
vibrations, fluid flow rate and external forces.
9.9.2 Pipe supporting

Never weld supports directly to the pipe. Supports shall be located so that different pipe loads
do not cause too high tension to equipment or flexible bellows.
9.9.2.1 Fixed supports

Fixed supports are used:
● Nearby equipment connections to protect equipment and flexible bellows from high tensions.
9-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

● To direct thermal expansion in directions where it can be received.

● To receive different forces acting on the pipeline.
9.9.2.2 Sliding supports

Sliding supports are used:
● Sliding supports should be located to protect the pipeline, equipment and flexible bellows
from high tensions coming from thermal expansion.
● To allow thermal expansion in directions where it can be received.
● To receive different forces acting on the pipeline.
9.9.3 Fuel pipes

Fuel pipes are exposed to fluctuating pressure disturbances from the injection pumps. These
pressure pulses must be taken into account when pipe supporting for fuel pipes are designed.
Fuel pipes should be rigidly supported not only nearby the engine, but also far away from the
engine in the external fuel system. The distance between supports should be positioned with
the shortest value mentioned in the section below.
9.9.4 Omega pipes
Installation procedure
1. The generating set (or engine) should be installed in its final position before any external
pipes are connected.
2. Fasten the flexible pipe connection to the connection on the engine according to the following
procedure:
2.1 If there is a counter flange, remove it.
2.2 Fasten the flexible pipe connection to the engine side with a gasket between the flanges.
2.3 Oil the threads of the screws and nuts, tighten first all screws until finger tight.
2.4 Tighten screws in a crosswise sequence using a socket wrench. Increase the tightening
torque gradually until the final torque is acheived.
3. Connect the free end of the flexible pipe connectionto the external pipe.
3.1 The flange of the external pipe should be in line with the flange of the engine. No twisting,
compression or elongation of the flexible pipe connection is allowed, i.e. it should fit in
between the flanges in a straight position without reshaping. Align the external pipe and weld
the counter flange to the pipe.
3.2 Bolt the flexible pipe connection to the flange of the external pipe as described in item 2.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 9-7

4. Anchor the external pipe to the steel structure of the ship close to the flange. Observe that
the pipe clamping must be very rigid in order to prevent vibration and movement of the
flexible pipe connection. Most problems with bursting of the flexible connection originate
from poor clamping.
5. The flexible pipe connection must be protected from external mechanical damage.
NOTE
The curved part of the pipe should always be installed downwards. It may be
installed upwards only when protected, stepping on an omega pipe instantly makes
the connection leak.
9.9.5 Pipe support nearby the diesel engine

The first three supports on the same pipeline next to the diesel engine are definitively exposed
to vibration that comes from the engine oscillation. Therefore it is very important that they are
positioned and fastened carefully and rigidly so that no resonant vibration can occur in any
direction. Pipe supports should be made of steel, supports made of plastic or similar materials
are not allowed. Rigid supporting of pipes will also prevent vibration and movement of the
flexible pipe connection.
Fig 9-2 Typical supports after bellows.
The first support after flexible bellows should be positioned as close as possible to the bellows.
If the first support is to far away from the bellows then the bellows lifetime will be shortened
considerably, the pipe is also exposed to increased forces that may injure the pipeline.
The second support should be positioned about 0.3...0.5 meter from the first support, the
reason why it should be so close to the first support is that this will reduce the vibrations of
the pipe end.
The third support can be positioned about 0.8...1.1 meter from the second support. Pipe
supports further in the pipeline can be placed with the same distance from each other.
9-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Fig 9-3 The supports after flexible bellows.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 9-9

9.10 Cleaning and flushing instructions

Refer to section "Cleaning procedures" for cleaning methods.
9.10.1 Fuel oil pipes

Before start up of the engines the external piping between the day tanks and the engines must
be flushed in order to remove any foreign particles such as welding slag.
The possibility to install a temporary flushing oil filter shall be considered in the piping design.
Disconnect the fuel pipes at the engine inlet and outlet (connections 101 and 102). Install a
temporary pipe or hose to connect the supply line to the return line, bypassing the engine.
The piping should be flushed through a flushing filter with mesh size 34 microns or finer.
The inserts of the filters should be removed. Heaters, automatic filters and the viscosimeter
should be bypassed to prevent damage caused by debris in the piping. The automatic fuel
filter must not be used as flushing filter.
The pump used should be protected by a suction strainer. The recommended flushing time
is min. 6 hours. During this time the welds in the fuel piping should be gently knocked at with
a hammer to release slag and the filter inspected and carefully cleaned at regular intervals.
9-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

9.10.2 Lubricating oil pipes

9.10.2.1 Piping and equipment built on the engine
Flushing of the piping and equipment built on the engine is not required and flushing oil shall
not be pumped through the engine oil system (which is flushed and clean from the factory).
It is however acceptable to circulate the flushing oil via the engine sump if this is advantageous.
Cleanliness of the oil sump shall be verified after completed flushing.
9.10.2.2 External lubricating oil system
Fig 9-4 Flushing of lubricating oil pipes
The external oil tanks, new oil tank (2T03), renovating oil tank (2T04) and renovated oil tank
(2T05) shall be verified to be clean before bunkering oil.
Especially pipes leading from the separator unit (2N01) directly to the engine (P1 and P2) shall
be ensured to be clean for instance by disconnecting from engine and blowing with compressed
air.
The external piping shall be cleaned by running the separator unit for not less than 24 hours.
All branches of the separator piping to be used.
If an electric motor driven stand-by pump (2P04) is installed off the engine this pipe branch
(P3) shall be flushed running the pump circulating engine oil through a temporary external oil
filter (recommended mesh 34 microns) returning the oil to the oil sump through a crankcase
door. The pump shall be protected by a suction strainer (2F06).
Whenever possible the separator unit shall be in operation during the flushing to remove dirt.
The separator unit is to be left running also after the flushing procedure, this to ensure that
any remaining contaminants are removed.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 9-11

9.10.2.3 Type of flushing oil

Viscosity
In order for the flushing oil to be able to remove dirt and transport it with the flow, ideal viscosity
is 10...50 cSt. The correct viscosity can be achieved by heating engine oil to about 65°C or
by using a separate flushing oil which has an ideal viscosity in ambient temperature.
Flushing with engine oil

The ideal is to use engine oil for flushing. This requires however that the separator unit is in
operation to heat the oil. Engine oil used for flushing can be reused as engine oil provided that
no debris or other contamination is present in the oil at the end of flushing.
Flushing with low viscosity flushing oil

If no separator heating is available during the flushing procedure it is possible to use a low
viscosity flushing oil instead of engine oil. In such a case the low viscosity flushing oil must
be disposed of after completed flushing. Great care must be taken to drain all flushing oil from
pockets and bottom of tanks so that flushing oil remaining in the system will not compromise
the viscosity of the actual engine oil.
Lubricating oil sample

To check the cleanliness a LO sample shall be taken by the shipyard after the flushing is
completed. The properties to be analyzed are Viscosity, BN, AN, Insolubles, Fe and Particle
Count.
Commissioning procedures shall in the meantime be continued without interruption unless
the commissioning engineer believes the oil is contaminated.
9-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Installation Planning Instructions 10. Automation System
10. Automation System
10.1 System overview

The engine automation system consist of control of the running parameters, monitoring of the
sensors and automatic safety operations.
10.1.1 Internal el & automation system

The engine is equipped with a distributed, built-on engine management system. It is an
embedded system which handles all strategic functionality such as engine start, stop, speed
control and engine safety.
The system is totally distributed in terms of physical modules. The modules communicate
with each other over an inter-module communication bus based on the CAN protocol. CAN
is a communication bus specifically developed for compact local networks, where high speed
data transfer and safety are of very high importance. The CAN-bus is physically doubled on
the engine, resulting in redundant communication in case of a failure of the primary bus
communication. In the same manner the power supply distribution is doubled on the engine.
Figure 10-1 shows the overall architecture of the system built on the engine.
Fig 10-1 System overall architecture
Short explanation of the modules used in the system:
MCM Main Control Module. Handles all strategic control functions (such as start/stop
sequencing and speed/load control) of the engine.
IOM Input/Output Module handles measurements and limited control functions in a
specific area on the engine.
ESM Engine Safety Module. Handles fundamental engine safety, and is the interface to
the engine’s shutdown devices and backup instruments.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-1

10. Automation System Installation Planning Instructions
LCP Local Control Panel is equipped with push buttons and switches for local engine
control, as well as indication of running hours and safety-critical operating para-
meters.
LDU Local Display Unit offers a set of menus for retrieval and graphical display of oper-
ating data, calculated data and event history.
PDM Power Distribution Module handles fusing, power distribution, earth fault monitoring
and EMC filtration in the system. It provides two fully redundant 24 VDC supplies
to all modules, sensors and control devices.
The system comprises the following major control/monitoring categories:

● Engine start- & stop management.
○ starting of the engine
○ stopping of the engine
○ start blocking
○ automatic shutdown of the engine
○ load reduction request
○ local control through local command buttons
● Speed and load control.
● Measuring engine speed and turbocharger speed.
● Measuring and signal processing of monitoring- and safety sensors.
● Readout of engine measurements on a local graphical display.
● Hardwired interface signals with external systems (e.g. with power management system,
main switchboard and propulsion control system).
● Modbus communication with ships alarm & monitoring system.
● System diagnostics.
The system ingress protection class is IP54.
The main connection box contains terminal strips for external interface connections. The yard
cables shall enter the connection box through cable glands and be connected to terminals.
10.1.1.1 Local controls & indications

The following operational functions are available in the LCP:
● Local start (HS721).
● Local stop (HS722).
● Local emergency speed setting selectors:
○ Normal / emergency mode
○ Decrease / Increase speed
● Local emergency stop (HS723).
● Local shutdown reset (HS725).
● Local mode selector switch (HS724) with the following positions:
○ Local: Engine start and stop can be done only at the local control panel.
○ Remote: Engine can be started and stopped only remotely.
○ Blow: In this position it is possible to perform a “blow” (an engine rotation check with
indicator valves open and disabled fuel injection) by the start button.
10-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

○ Blocked: Normal start of the engine is not possible.

The following backup indications are available in the LCP:
● Engine speed.
● Turbocharger speed.
● Running hour counter.
● Lubricating oil pressure.
● HT cooling water temperature.
The graphical Local Display Unit shows on a set of menus all measurements and calculations
and provides various engine status indications as well as an event history.
Fig 10-2 Local controls and indications
10.2 Control signals

The following chapter provides information of the signals between the engine with its related
engine automation and other systems onboard the ship. The signals listed below may be in
excess of what is needed for this installation. For more exact recommendation of typical use-
and routing of the signals and yard cabling see drawing “Block/Interconnection diagram”
included in this chapter.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-3

Digital input signals are powered from the engine (24 VDC), i.e. a potential free contact is
required in the external system.
Digital output signals are, unless otherwise specified below, potential free opto relay output
signals with contact rating of 24 VDC / 0.2 A.
Analogue input signals have, unless otherwise specified below, an input load of 200 Ohm.
10.2.1 Output signals

10.2.1.1 IS 872 Engine ready for start
The signal is closed when the engine is ready for start and no internal or external start blockings
are active.
10.2.1.2 IB 726 Remote control indication

This is a potential free contact from the local/remote operation mode selection switch, closed
contact = remote mode. In local mode all starting and stopping can only be done locally at
the engine. In remote mode all starting and stopping can only be done from the remote control
system.
10.2.1.3 IS 181 Speed switch 1 (Engine running)

The signal is closed when the engine is above 40% of rated speed.
10.2.1.4 IS 190 Ready to clutch

The signal is closed when the engine speed is within a predefined clutch-in speed window.
In case of a twin-in / single out gearbox configuration, for the second engine to be clutched
in, the signal is closed once the speed is equal to the first engine plus an offset of 10-30 rpm.
10.2.1.5 IS 875 Start failure indication

The signal is activated (closed contact) if the engine has not reached firing speed in abt. 20
sec. after the start signal has been activated. The output is automatically reset after the engine
has come to standstill.
10.2.1.6 OS 7315 Loadreduction request

The signal is activated (closed contact) when a process value (e.g. temperature or pressure)
is outside acceptable limits for normal operation. The load should be reduced preferably
automatically by the propulsion control system, or if so desired manually by the operator.
10.2.1.7 IS 7323 Shutdown prewarning

The signal is activated (closed contact) when a shutdown limit has been exceeded but 10
seconds prior to the execution of the engine shutdown.
See input signal OS 7306 Stop / shutdown override.
10.2.1.8 IS 7603 Stop / shutdown status 2

The signal is closed when the engine is being stopped (locally or remote) or shutdown by the
safety system, except for overspeed and reduction gear lube oil pressure low (see input signal
OS 7311 External shutdown 3). The signal remains on as long as the stop signal is active. I.e.
in case of normal stop, until the stop timer has expired and the engine has come to complete
standstill and in case of shutdown until the engine has come to complete standstill, the
shutdown cause is cleared and been manually reset.
The signal is typically used for de-clutching the engine from the propeller shaft.
10-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10.2.1.9 IS 166 Engine overload

The signal is closed when the fuel demand reach 100% level. Typically used for indication
lamp in propulsion control panel to indicate when engine max load is reached.
10.2.1.10 NS 881 Engine control system minor alarm

The signal is activated when there is an internal fault in the engine control system. At a healthy
condition the contact is closed.
The signal is activated by:
● Failure in any of the electronic modules
● Failure in Engine Safety Module
● Failure in local control panel
● Loss of one redundant power supply
● Loss of one redundant CAN communication bus
10.2.1.11 NS 886 Engine control system major failure

The signal is activated (open contact) when there is serious fault in the control system.
When the major failure signal is activated, the engine will be shut down.
10.2.1.12 IB 7324 Engine shutdown status

The graphical Local Display Unit shows on a set of menus all measurements and calculations
and provides various engine status indications as well as an event history.
The signal is activated (closed contact) when a shutdown function is activated. The signal can
be used as a common shutdown indication. (Individual shutdown reasons are identified via
the modbus link and locally on the LDU.)
10.2.1.13 NS 885 Common engine alarm

The signal is activated (open contact) when there is an abnormal process value (e.g. temperature
or pressure). The individual alarm reason is transmitted over the modbus link. This hardwired
signal can be used as a backup in case the modbus communication fails. To avoid duplicate
alarm indication it is recommended that this signal is disabled while the modbus communication
is healthy.
10.2.1.14 OS 441 Pre-lubrication pump control / Pre-heater control

This signal is closed when the engine speed is below 40% speed, which is the limit below
which the pre-lubricating pump and cooling water pre-heater pump shall continuously run.
This output can ONLY be used for DC control voltage. I.e. this is typically connected to the
ships automation system as reference signal in case the motor starters are controlled from
the ships automation system.
10.2.1.15 CV 223 Pre-lubrication pump control / Pre-heater control

This signal is closed when the engine speed is below 40% speed, which is the limit below
which the pre-lubricating pump and cooling water pre-heater pump shall continuously run.
This output can ONLY be used for AC control voltage. I.e. this is typically connected directly
to the control circuit of the motor starter. The contact rating is 255 VAC / 0.6 A. However, in
order to keep a safe voltage level in the main cabinet on the engine, the control voltage of the
motor starter is required to be 24 VAC.
For further details of wiring see drawing “prelubricating pump starter".
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-5

10.2.1.16 CV 210 Lube oil stand-by pump start

This signal is used only in case stand-by pump is used and automatic start is applicable.
This signal is closed when the lube oil pressure drops below a predefined setpoint and the
engine is running. This output shall ONLY be used for 24 VAC control voltage. I.e. this is
typically connected directly to the control circuit of the motor starter.
When applicable, see drawing “lube oil stand-by pump starter" for further details of wiring.
10.2.1.17 CV 410 HT jacket water stand-by pump start

This signal is available but used only in case stand-by pump is used and automatic start is
applicable.
This signal is closed when the HT jacket water pressure drops below a predefined setpoint
and the engine is running. This output shall ONLY be used for 24V AC control voltage. I.e. this
is typically connected directly to the control circuit of the motor starter.
When applicable, see drawing “HT stand-by pump starter" for further details of wiring.
10.2.1.18 CV 460 LT water stand-by pump start

This signal is available but used only in case stand-by pump is used and automatic start is
applicable.
This signal is closed when the LT water pressure drops below a predefined setpoint and the
engine is running. This output shall ONLY be used for 24V AC control voltage. I.e. this is
typically connected directly to the control circuit of the motor starter.
When applicable, see drawing “LT stand-by pump starter" for further details of wiring.
10.2.1.19 SI 196 Engine speed

This is a galvanically isolated analogue output signal. The signal type is 4-20 mA and max
external load is 500 Ω.
Range 0 – 1200 rpm.
10.2.1.20 SI 518 TC A speed

external load is 500 Ω.
Range 0 – 75000 rpm.
10.2.1.21 CT 7001 Engine load

external load is 500 Ω. The 4-20 mA range correspond to a fuel demand or fuel rack position
of 0-110%.
10.2.2 Input signals

10.2.2.1 OS 7302 Remote start
Activating this input (closed contact) will activate the engine starting sequence, if no start
blockings are active and the local/remote switch is in remote mode. The input should be
activated for about 1 second.
10.2.2.2 OS 7304 Remote stop

Activating this input (closed contact) will activate the engine stop sequence if the local/remote
selector switch is in remote. The input should be activated for about 1 second.
10-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10.2.2.3 OS 7312 External start blocking 1

Opening the contact to this input will block the starting of the engine. This input is typically
used for start blocking in case the clutch is engaged.
10.2.2.4 OS 7313 External start blocking 2

Opening the contact to this input will block the starting of the engine. This input is typically
used for start blocking in case of low gearbox pre-lubricating oil pressure.
10.2.2.5 OS 7309 External shutdown 1

This shutdown input is activated by a closed contact. The external contact should be equipped
with a 22 kΩ resistor for wire break monitoring. There is a shutdown delay as explained under
output signal IS 7323 Shutdown prewarning.
10.2.2.6 OS 7311 External shutdown 3

with a 22 kΩ resistor for wire break monitoring. The input is typically used for shutdown from
low gearbox lubricating oil pressure. The shutdown is inhibited while the engine is standstill.
There is a shutdown delay as explained under output signal IS 7323 Shutdown prewarning.
10.2.2.7 OS 7305 External shutdown 4 (Emergency stop)

with a 22 kΩ resistor for wire break monitoring. This signal is typically used for e.g. emergency
stop buttons or ships emergency shutdown (ESD) system.
10.2.2.8 OS 7308 Remote shutdown reset

Activating this input (closed contact) will reset a shutdown and enable re-start of the engine.
A shutdown can be reset only if the engine has come to full stop and the shutdown is not
active anymore. Before re-start the reason for the shutdown must be carefully checked and
corrected.
10.2.2.9 OS 7306 Stop / shutdown override

Activating this input (closed contact) will override all shutdowns except for emergency stop
and overspeed. If the input is activated during the prewarning delay the shutdown is prevented.
10.2.2.10 GS 7600 Clutch status

This input shall be activated (closed contact) when the clutch is closed. The signal is used to
optimise the engine dynamic response.
10.2.2.11 OS 7601 Clutch in request

Activating this input (closed contact) will ramp the speed reference to a predetermined clutch
in speed. Once this speed is reached the output IS190 ready to close clutch is closed. See
further info in the section "Speed control functions & loadsharing".
10.2.2.12 OT 190 Analogue speed reference

This is an analogue 4-20 mA input signal. The signal shall be isolated external to the engine.
The range of the signal is:
● 4 mA = minimum operating speed
● 20 mA = rated speed
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-7

Refer to section "About the main engine" for information about minimum/clutch-in speed and
rated speed.
10.2.2.13 OS 7325 Analogue speed ref. select

Activating this input (closed contact) will enable the speed reference to be set by the OT190
Analog speed reference 4-20mA signal. See further info in the section "Speed control functions
& loadsharing".
10.2.2.14 OS 7326 Fixed speed select

Activating this input (closed contact) will ramp the engine speed reference to a predetermined
speed. After reaching this speed, the speed reference can be changed by the OS163 speed/load
increase and OS164 speed/load decrease inputs. See further info in section "Speed control
functions & loadsharing".
10.2.2.15 OS 7329 Isochronous loadsharing enable

Activating this input will enable isochronous loadsharing. See further info in section "Speed
control functions & loadsharing".
10.3 Bus communication

The main interface with the ships alarm & monitoring system is a bus communication through
which all measured values, alarm- and status indications are transmitted. For details, see
drawing “Modbus list”.
10.4 Functional description of start/stop

10.4.1 Start function
The engine is equipped with a pneumatic starting motor, which drives the engine through a
gear rim on the flywheel.
The engine can be started locally by the start button HS721, or remotely if applicable for the
installation e.g. from the engine control room.
For functions causing start blocking, see drawing “Modbus list”.
10.4.2 Stop and shutdown function

A normal stop can be initiated locally by button HS722, or remotely if applicable for the
installation. At normal stop the stop sequence is active by a timer function until the engine
has come to standstill. Thereafter the system automatically returns to “ready for start” mode
in case no start block functions are active, i.e. there is no need for manually resetting a normal
stop.
The safety of the engine is mainly handled by the Engine Safety Module (ESM). The ESM
performs sensor failure detection on the shutdown sensors and solenoids. A safety shutdown
must be manually reset (either locally by shutdown reset button HS725, or remotely if
applicable). Reset is possible only when the engine has come to full stop and the shutdown
is not active anymore. Before re-start the reason for the shutdown must be carefully checked
and corrected.
At a stop or shutdown the actuator/governor is driving the fuel rack control shaft to zero
position. Additionally, pneumatic cylinders on each fuel injection pump are forcing the fuelracks
to zero position by means of compressed air, thereby disabling the fuel injection.
For functions causing safety shutdown, see drawing “Modbus list”.
10-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10.5 Speed control functions & loadsharing

10.5.1 General
10.5.1.1 Introduction
This instruction describes the functionality of the UNIC speed controller. The controller is a
software module in the Main Control Module.
In the speed control algorithm the speed reference is compared with the measured engine
speed. The difference between these signals constitutes the input to a PID-controller. The
regulation output of the MCM controller will accordingly change, to sustain the reference level.
This output will set the position request of the fuel actuator, i.e. control the diesel fuel rack
position. In case of common rail engines or dual fuel engines the fuel injection duration is
controlled. Two speed sensors are simultaneously used by the controller, and if one of them
fails, an alarm is raised and the engine continues operation without interruption.
10.5.1.2 Dynamics
The PID-controller uses different sets of dynamic parameters for operation under acceleration,
under no-load conditions and under loading conditions, to obtain optimal stability at all times.
The PID settings are speed dependent for start acceleration and for open clutch conditions,
and load/speed dependent when the engine is loaded.
10.5.1.3 Limiters
Three fuel limiters are available.
● A start fuel limiter is active during the engine start. The start fuel limiter is speed dependent,
and the limiter works in combination with a speed reference ramp, used at engine start.
The acceleration ramp is set for an optimal acceleration rate.
● A charge air pressure limiter is used to reduce overfuelling and black smoke at load steps
at low engine load levels.
● A load dependent fuel limiter is used to set an envelope of the max. fuelling at various
engine loads. This feature will improve the engine’s load acceptance, but is also used as
a limiter for the engine max. load output.
10.5.1.4 Control modes

The speed controller has different sub-control modes, which in brief are described below:
● CB open control mode, active during engine start and in run mode until the clutch has
been closed. Start fuel limiter set to be used in this mode.
● Speed droop control and load sharing mode, active after closure of the clutch in case
speed droop mode is selected. This mode is normally not used in mechanical propulsion
applications.
● Isochronous control and load sharing mode, active after closure of the clutch when
isochronous mode has been selected. This is the normal operating mode for an engine
driving a single propeller (and shaft generator, when applicable) via a reduction gear.
These control modes will be further described in the following paragraphs.
For more exact recommendation of typical use- and routing of signals and yard cabling see
drawing “Block/interconnection diagram” included in this chapter.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-9

10.5.2 CB open control mode

10.5.2.1 Engine start
When an engine is started the speed is ramped up to the speed determined by the OT 190
analogue speed reference and the control operates in CB open control mode.
10.5.2.2 Running at no load

If OS 7325 analog speed ref. select is closed, the engine follows the analog speed reference
in this mode until the propeller is clutched in and the GS 7600 clutch status feedback contact
closes.
If OS 7325 analog speed ref. select is open the engine speed can be changed by the use of
OS 163 speed/load increase and OS 164 speed/load decrease inputs. For the entire duration
that these inputs remain closed, the speed reference is biased up- or down according to the
pre-set ramp rate.
Closing input OS 7326 fixed speed select, will ramp the speed reference to a predetermined
speed. After reaching this speed, the speed reference can be changed by the OS 163
speed/load increase and OS 164 speed/load decrease inputs.
Closing input OS 7601 clutch in request on a single propulsion engine, or the first of two
engines in a twin-in/single out gear installation, will cause the speed reference to ramp to a
predetermined clutch in speed. Once this speed is reached the output IS 190 ready to clutch
is activated.
The priority order of the three speed selection inputs is the following (highest priority first):
● OS 7601 clutch in request
● OS 7326 fixed speed
● OS 7325 analog speed reference select
10.5.3 Speed droop control and load sharing mode

10.5.3.1 Description
The speed droop control and loadsharing mode is normally not used in mechanical propulsion
applications. It may however be of interest in case a primary driven shaft generator is used
and the operating modes include running the shaft generator without the propeller clutched
in. I.e. operations as generating set and in particular if two or more generating sets are operated
in parallel.
When the engine is operated in this mode, load sharing with other engines is provided with
the use of speed droop. Droop control is a basic load sharing method, by which parallel running
engines share their load by decreasing their internal speed reference proportionally to an
increase engine load. The speed control is adjusted to 4 % speed droop
In systems with speed droop as the primary load sharing method it is necessary to actively
transfer load to a recently connected generator from parallel generators in order to achieve
even load on all generators. Before disconnecting a generator it must be correspondingly
unloaded. Loading and unloading is normally performed automatically by a power management
system. The power management system commonly also corrects the frequency to eliminate
the speed droop offset, which is proportional to the system load. The power management
system performs load balancing and frequency correction by adjusting the speed references
of the individual engines. (OS 163 speed/load increase and OS 164 speed/load decrease).
The controlling system (power management system) should not perform adjustments with
shorter intervals than the controlled system (generating sets) responds. In order to achieve
smooth load sharing it is important to implement suitable dead bands in the control.
10-10 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

If the power management system performs continuous load balancing and frequency correction,
it should include the following features:
● Pulse length and time between pulses shall be adjustable. If the same control system also
handles automatic synchronization, then pulse length, time between pulses and dead band
shall be separately adjustable for synchronisation.
● The time between pulses shall be sufficiently long. After a correction it can take up to 30
seconds before the actual adjustment has reached 95% of the set point change. The control
system should therefore wait at least 10 seconds before giving a new pulse.
● The control system should preferably determine the length of the pulse based on the size
of the desired correction and then wait for 30 seconds or more before performing a new
correction.
● A control dead band should be implemented, allowing for an uneven load of min ±2% of
nominal power and a frequency drift of min ±1%.
● The corrections should not be based on instantly sampled values. The corrections should
be based on the average value over several seconds. 10 seconds is a suitable time span.
10.5.4 Isochronous control and load sharing

10.5.4.1 Description
An engine operating in isochronous mode, will regulate the speed to the speed reference,
regardless of the load level of the system.
If OS 7325 analog speed ref. select is closed, the engine follows the analog speed reference.
If OS 7325 analog speed ref. select is open the engine speed can be changed by the use of
OS 163 speed/load increase and OS 164 speed/load decrease inputs. For the entire duration
that these inputs remain closed, the speed reference is biased up- or down according to the
pre-set ramp rate.
Closing input OS 7326 fixed speed select, will ramp the speed reference to a predetermined
speed. After reaching this speed, the speed reference can be changed by the OS 163
speed/load increase and OS 164 speed/load decrease inputs.
10.6 Power unit

For each engine a power supply cabinet is delivered for providing the 24 VDC power supply
required by the engine and for providing isolation from other DC systems on board.
The cabinet is designed for bulkhead mounting, protection degree IP44, max ambient temp
50 °C.
The power unit is designed for two incoming power supplies, of which at least one is to be
supplied from a UPS.
For further information see drawings “Power Unit” and “Block/Interconnection diagram”
included in this chapter.
10.7 Precautions
The automation system contains circuit boards that are sensitive both to damage by
electrostatic discharge (ESD) and mechanical damage. Therefore, the following precautions
can significantly reduce the risk of system failure or malfunction:
● Protect all modules against moisture and uncleanness by using moisture proof covering
during storing at yard/site. If exposed to humidity during these stages, the components
must be carefully dried. Otherwise wiring connections may become unreliable.
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-11

● Avoid ESD to modules by not touching circuit boards and module connectors without ESD
protection.
● Locate the communication cables between engine and control panels as far away as
possible, at least 300 mm, from power and high voltage cables. If this is not possible, pull
the communication cables in grounded steel conduits.
● Make sure the engine is well grounded, not connected to external systems and that the
power is switched off before installation work is done near the engine. This is especially
important during electrical welding in the engine room.
● When welding ensure that welding earth is close to the welding point.
● Power-on of the automation system must not be done until a Wärtsilä Service Engineer
has checked and approved the cabling/connections.
● Cabling/connections should be done according to Wärtsilä project specific drawings.
Important is to use shields and cable-pairs accordingly.
● Keep cabinets and modules closed at all time, as far as practically possible. If opened for
some reason, avoid touching circuit boards and connector pins.
● Avoid using RF-equipment near modules when covers are open or there are unconnected
connectors or wires.
WARNING
Arc welding on or close to the engine must be avoided if cables are connected to
the automation system.

10.8.1 Power Unit (9N36)
Quantity ........................................ 2
10.8.2 Engine control panel for the bridge (IP22) (8N09)

Quantity ........................................ 2
10.8.3 Engine control panel for a wing on the bridge (IP22)

Quantity ........................................ 2
10.8.4 Pressure indicator box

Quantity ........................................ 2
Drawing ......................................... DAAF025194, Pos 4
10.8.5 Starter for engine pre lubricating oil pump (9N03)

Quantity ........................................ 2
10-12 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10.8.6 Motor starter (Circulating pump MDO) (9N28)

Quantity ........................................ 1
10.8.7 Engine revolution indicator box

Quantity ........................................ 2
Drawing ......................................... DAAF025194, Pos 2

DBAE705678 a Block- / Interconnection diagram .............................................. 10-14
DBAE712991 a Engine modbus list .................................................................... 10-24
DBAE705679 a Power unit .................................................................................. 10-29
DBAE705681 - Bridge control panel ................................................................... 10-35
DBAE705683 - Wing control panel ..................................................................... 10-38
DAAF025194 - Indicator Box .............................................................................. 10-40
DBAE705685 a Prelube pump starter ................................................................. 10-42
DBAE705687 b MDF Circulating pump starter ................................................... 10-46
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-13

1
10-14
DBAE705678 a - Block- / Interconnection diagram
- - - - -
Krasnoe 04001 Index page ABA009 18 Dec 2017 EN
- - - - -
- - - - - Block- / Interconnection diagram
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 1 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

START AIR
INDICATOR
2 START AIR
PRESSURE
BOX SENSOR
230VAC
400VAC 24VDC PROPULSION

PRELUBE POWER UNIT CONTROL
REDUCTION SYSTEM
GEARBOX ENGINE 1: W6L20 (UNIC C2) PUMP
STARTER ENGINE SPEED
INDICATOR
BOX
FPP
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

LUBE OIL HT WATER LT WATER BRIDGE

STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY CONTROL
PUMP STARTER PUMP STARTER PUMP STARTER PANEL
SAFETY SAFETY
FINE FILTER
FILTER FILTER
FUEL OIL (MDF)
(MDF) (HFO)
CIRCULATION
PUMP STARTER
400VAC
INTEGRATED
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
PORT WING STBD WING
400VAC PREHEATING CONTROL CONTROL
UNIT PANEL PANEL
START AIR START AIR
INDICATOR PRESSURE
BOX SENSOR
230VAC
400VAC 24VDC PROPULSION

PRELUBE POWER UNIT CONTROL
REDUCTION SYSTEM
GEARBOX ENGINE 2: W6L20 (UNIC C2) PUMP
STARTER BRIDGE
CONTROL
PANEL
FPP
LUBE OIL HT WATER LT WATER

STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY ENGINE SPEED
PUMP STARTER PUMP STARTER PUMP STARTER INDICATOR
BOX
Power cable / instrumentation cable

Power cable / instrumentation cable
- - - - -
Krasnoe 04001 Overview diagram ABA009 18 Dec 2017 EN
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 2 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
10-15
3
10-16
POWER UNIT, IAS
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET - POWER UNIT POWER SUPPLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM
WÄRTSILÄ - WÄRTSILÄ - -
F1 -
L 1 1 W301 1 - L POWER SUPPLY 1
N 3 2 - 2 - N 230VAC ~250W
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
F2 -
+ 1 1 W302 1 - + POWER SUPPLY 2
- 3 2 - 2 - - 24VDC ~250W
UPS SUPPLY
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
HS801-1 F3
+ 1 1 1 2 + POWER SUPPLY 1
- 3 2 W303 2 4 - 24VDC, MCB: 10A
- PE-BAR
PE 3 3 PE
CABLE GLAND
- PE
HS801-1 F4
+ 5 1 1 2 + POWER SUPPLY 2
- 7 2 W304 2 4 - 24VDC, MCB: 10A
- PE-BAR
PE 3 3 PE
CABLE GLAND
- PE
X1 -
POWER FAILURE 1 1 W305 1 -
open = alarm 2 2 2 x 0.75 2 -
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
MCM-1-X24 -
MODBUS RS485 + 7 1 W306 1 -
2-wire - 8 2 1 x 2 x 0.5 2 -
CABLE GLAND IE-BAR
- IE
PE-BAR
PE
MCM-1-X43 -
COMMON ENGINE ALARM 5 1 1 -
NS885 6 2 2 -
ENGINE CONTROL 7 3 3 -
SYSTEM MINOR ALARM 8 4 4 -
NS881
W307
MCM-1-X44
ENGINE CONTROL 1 5 8 x 0.75 5 -
SYSTEM MAJOR FAILURE 2 6 6 -
NS886
XM6
LOCAL EMERGENCY SPEED 6 7 7 -
SETTING ALARM 7 8 8 -
CABLE GLAND PE-BAR

- PE
Types of cables and grouping of signals in different cables to be checked and finally determined by Shipyard/Owner
- - - - -
Krasnoe 04001 Connection diagram ABA009 18 Dec 2017 EN
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 3 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

INDICATORS
4
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET POWER UNIT ENGINE SPEED INDICATOR BOX PRESSURE SENSOR IN STARTING AIR SYSTEM STARTING AIR PRESSURE INDICATOR BOX
WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ - WÄRTSILÄ
F9 X1
POWER SUPPLY + 2 1 W401 1 1 +
24VDC - 4 2 - 2 2 -
Fuse: 4A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
XM7 X1
ENGINE SPEED, SI196 19 1 W402 1 17
n
4-20 mA = 0-1200 rpm I 20 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 18
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

CABLE GLAND PE-BAR

- PE
PE
X1 X1
ENGINE SPEED 21 1 W403 1 7
I
4-20mA = 0-1200 rpm I 22 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 8
PE-BAR
PE
PE
F8 X1
24VDC INPUT VOLTAGE
- 4 2 - 2 2 -
Fuse: 4A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
- X1
STARTING AIR - 1 W405 1 7 +
P
PRESSURE SENSOR I - 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 8 -
0-40bar = 4-20mA
PE-BAR
PE
PE
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 4 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
10-17
5
10-18
BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET POWER UNIT BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL - -
WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ - -
F6 X1
24VDC - 4 2 - 2 2 -
Fuse: 4A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
XM7 X1
1 1 1 8 REMOTE START
2 2 2 9 OS7302
3 3 3 10 REMOTE STOP
4 4 4 11 OS7304
7 5 5 12 REMOTE SHUTDOWN RESET
8 6 6 13 OS7308
27 7 7 16 STOP/SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE
28 8 8 17 OS7306
REMOTE CONTROL 9 9 9 20
IB726 11 10 W502 10 21
ENGINE SHUTDOWN 17 11 16 x 0.75 11 18
IB7324 18 12 12 19
SHUTDOWN PREWARNING 33 13 13 26
IS7323 34 14 14 27
K1
READY FOR START 13 15 15 22
IS872 14 16 16 23
CABLE GLAND
-
X1 X1
ENGINE OVERLOAD 38 1 W503 1 24
- 39 2 2 x 0.75 2 25
PE-BAR
PE
X1 X1
I
4-20mA = 0-1200 rpm I 24 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 29
PE-BAR
PE
PE
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 5 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

BRIDGE AND WING CONTROL PANEL
6
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET POWER UNIT BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL PORT WING CONTROL PANEL STBD WING CONTROL PANEL
WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ
ENGINE 1 POWER UNIT

F7 X1
24VDC - 4 2 - 2 2 -
Fuse: 4A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
X1 X1
I
4-20mA = 0-1200 rpm I 26 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 17
PE-BAR
PE
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

PE
X1 X1
I
4-20mA = 0-1200 rpm I 28 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 17
PE-BAR
PE
PE
ENGINE 2 POWER UNIT

F7 X1
24VDC - 4 2 - 2 2 -
Fuse: 4A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
X1 X1
I
4-20mA = 0-1200 rpm I 26 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 19
PE-BAR
PE
PE
X1 X1
I
4-20mA = 0-1200 rpm I 28 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 19
PE-BAR PORT BRIDGE PANEL
PE
PE
X1 X1
EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN 4 14 1 W607 1 8
(EMERGENCY STOP) OS7305 15 2 2 x 0.75 2 9
R=22kΩ
X1 X1
PORT ENGINE
XM7 X1
5 1 W609 1 10 EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN 4
6 2 2 x 0.75 2 11 (EMERGENCY STOP) OS7305
STBD BRIDGE PANEL

X1 X1
R=22kΩ
X1 X1
STBD ENGINE (EMERGENCY STOP) OS7305 15 2 2 13
2 x 0.75
XM7 X1
5 1 W612 1 14 EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN 4
6 2 2 x 0.75 2 15 (EMERGENCY STOP) OS7305
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 6 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
10-19
7
10-20
PROPULSION CONTROL SYSTEM, GEARBOX
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET POWER UNIT GEARBOX PROPULSION CONTROL SYSTEM -
WÄRTSILÄ WÄRTSILÄ - - -
XM7 -
EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN 3 39 1 W701 1 - GEARBOX LO PRESSURE LOW
OS7311 40 2 2 x 0.75 2 - R=22kΩ
closed = shutdown
CABLE GLAND PE-BAR
- PE
MCM-1-X44 X1
LOAD REDUCTION REQUEST 3 1 1 4
OS7315 4 2 2 11
XM7
ENGINE RUNNING 15 3 3 5
IS181 16 4 W702 4 12
10 x 0.75 5 6
SPEED WINDOW 1 29 5
IS7601-1 30 6 6 13
STOP/SHUTDOWN 2 STATUS 25 7 7 7
IS7603 26 8 8 14
MCM-1-X44
ENGINE OVERLOAD 5 9 9 8
IS166 6 10 10 15
CABLE GLAND PE-BAR

- PE
X1 -
LOAD REDUCTION REQUEST 37 1 1 -
STOP/SHUTDOWN STATUS 2 36 2 W703 2 -
SPEED WINDOW 1 35 3 3 -
ENGINE RUNNING 34 4 5 x 0.75 4 -
COMMON 33 5 5 -
CABLE GLAND PE-BAR

- PE
MCM-1-X15
1 1 1 - EXTERNAL START BLOCK 1
2 2 2 - OS7312
W704 open = start block
MCM-1-X14 4 x 0.75
3 3 3 - CLUTCH STATUS
4 4 4 - GS7600
CABLE GLAND PE-BAR

- PE
MCM-1-X41 -
3 1 W705 1 - I ANALOGUE SPEED REFERENCE
4 2 1 x 2 x 0.75 2 - I OT190 (4-20mA)
CABLE GLAND IE-BAR
-
IE
PE-BAR
PE
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 7 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

PRELUBE PUMP STARTER, PREHEATING UNIT
8
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET ENGINE PRELUBE PUMP STARTER POWER SUPPLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Q1 -
2 1 W801 1 - L1 U=400V, f=50Hz
4 2 2 - L2 P=3.0kW
6 3 - 3 - L3 In=5.8A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
K4 X1
PRELUBE PUMP CONTROL 13 1 W802 1 4
CV223 14 2 2 x 0.75 2 5
closed when engine is not running
CONTACT RATING: 253VAC, 0.6A CABLE GLAND PE-BAR
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

(MAX 30VAC TO BE USED) - PE
M201 F1
PRELUBE PUMP U1 1 W803 1 2 L1
MOTOR V1 2 2 4 L2
W1 3 - 3 6 L3
PE-BAR
PE PE
X1 -
PUMP RUNNING 6 1 1 -
closed = running 7 2 W804 2 -
PUMP FAILURE 8 3 4 x 0.75 3 -
open = failure 9 4 4 -
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
PREHEATING UNIT
WÄRTSILÄ
Q0 -
2 1 W805 1 - L1 U=400V, f=50Hz
4 2 2 - L2 P=27.5kW
6 3 - 3 - L3
ENGINE 1 MAIN CABINET PE-BAR PE-BAR

PE PE
K3 X3
PREHEATER CONTROL 13 1 W806 1 1
OS441 14 2 2 x 0.75 2 2
CONTACT RATING: 30VDC, 3A CABLE GLAND PE-BAR
- PE
ENGINE 2 MAIN CABINET

K3 X3
PREHEATER CONTROL 13 1 W807 1 3
OS441 14 2 2 x 0.75 2 4
CONTACT RATING: 30VDC, 3A CABLE GLAND PE-BAR
- PE
X2 -
PREHEATER FAILURE 1 1 1 -
open = alarm 2 2 W808 2 -
PREHEATER RUNNING 3 3 4 x 0.75 3 -
closed = running 4 4 4 -
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 8 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
10-21
9
10-22
STANDBY PUMP STARTERS
ENGINE / MAIN CABINET - LUBE OIL STANDBY PUMP STARTER - -
WÄRTSILÄ - - - -
K21 -
LUBE OIL STANDBY PUMP CONTROL 13 1 W901 1 -
PS210 14 2 2 x 0.75 2 5
closed = press.low and engine running
CONTACT RATING: 253V AC/DC, 1.7A CABLE GLAND PE-BAR
(MAX 30V AC/DC TO BE USED) - PE
HT-WATER STANDBY PUMP STARTER

-
K22 -
HT-WATER STANDBY PUMP CONTROL 13 1 W902 1 -
PS410 14 2 2 x 0.75 2 -
LT-WATER STANDBY PUMP STARTER

-
K23 -
LT-WATER STANDBY PUMP CONTROL 13 1 W903 1 -
PS460 14 2 2 x 0.75 2 -
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 9 / 10
- - - - -
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

FUEL OIL CIRCULATION PUMP STARTER, FILTERS
10
FUEL OIL CIRCULATION PUMP FUEL OIL CIRCULATION PUMP STARTER SAFETY FILTER (HFO) POWER SUPPLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Q1 -
2 1 W1001 1 - L1 U=400V, f=50Hz
4 2 2 - L2 P=2.2kW
6 3 - 3 - L3 In=4.55A
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
1P03 F1
FUEL OIL CIRCULATION PUMP U1 1 W1002 1 2 L1
MOTOR V1 2 2 4 L2
-
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

W1 3 3 6 L3
PE-BAR
PE PE
X1 -
4 1 1 - REMOTE CONTROL
5 2 2 - close to run
PUMP RUNNING 6 3 3 -
closed = running 7 4 W1003 4 -
PUMP FAILURE 8 5 8 x 0.75 5 -
open = failure 9 6 6 -
REMOTE MODE 12 7 7 -
closed = remote 13 8 8 -
PE-BAR PE-BAR
PE PE
1F03 -
DIFF PRESSURE ALARM 1a 1 W1004 1 -
open = alarm 3a 2 2 x 0.75 2 -
PE-BAR
PE
SAFETY FILTER (MDF)

WÄRTSILÄ
1F07 -
open = alarm 3a 2 2 x 0.75 2 -
PE-BAR
PE
FINE FILTER (MDF)

WÄRTSILÄ
1F05 -
open = alarm 3a 2 2 x 0.75 2 -
PE-BAR
PE
- - - - -
- - - - -
SP/03342 W6L20 MKA056 18 Dec 2017 A3 10 / 10
a 27 Feb 2018 ABA009 MKA056 Electrical data for FO pump added
- - - SKL001 18 Dec 2017 DBAE705678 a
10-23
10-24
Modbus communication link

Communication speed: 19200 bits/s
Communication mode: RTU
Data bits: 8
Parity: NONE
Stop bits: 1
Commands in use: 02 (Input status), 03 (Holding register)
DBAE712991 a - Engine modbus list
Polling delay: 200 ms (recommended)

Physical interface: RS-485 2-wire
Title Explanation
Code Sensor code
Name Signal name
Type Signal type
Range / Unit Signal range and unit
Set point - Alarm Set point for alarm condition
Set point - Stop Set point for stop / shutdown condition
Set point - L.red. Set point for load reduction request condition
Modbus addresses - Anal. On analog addresses (40xxx) integer value multiplied by Scale is shown
Modbus addresses - Alarm On alarm addresses (10xxx) 0 = normal and 1 = alarm ON
Modbus addresses - Stop On stop addresses (11xxx) 0 = normal and 1= stop ON
Modbus addresses - L.red. On load reduction addresses (12xxx) 0 = normal and 1 = load reduction request ON
Alarm cond. Condition for alarm / stop / load reduction activation
Error values -32767 = value not update (not configured) and -32765 = sensor failure
BL Alarm is blocked in stop mode
Delay Activation delay in UNIC software
a 16.4.2018 FBL002 JRE002 WY196_2 alarm setpoint updated

Rev Date Made Checked Description
MODBUS SLAVE ID ENGINE NUMBER Wärtsilä Finland OY MODBUS CODE LIST TO W20 UNIC C2
1 XAAA672518 WIO Marine main engine with FP propeller
XAAA672522 KRASNOE 04001
This drawing is property of Wärtsilä Finland Oy and shall not be copied, shown nor communicated to a third party without the consent of the owner.
Proj.no Product Made: Rahunen 3.1.2018 KRA042 Pages Document No Rev.
SP/03342 W6L20 Approved: Remsu 3.1.2018 JRE002 1/4 DBAE712991 a
1(5) DBAE712991 a.xlsx Revision a
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

SP/03342, KRASNOE 04001, W6L20, DBAE712991 rev. a
B Type Range / Set point Alarm Modbus Addresses
Code Name L Unit Alarm Delay L.red. Delay Stop Delay cond Anal. Alarm L.red. Stop Scale Rev.
Fuel oil
PT101 Fuel oil pressure, inlet X 4-20 mA 0-16 bar 5,50 3s low 40001 10001 100
TE101 Fuel oil temp., inlet X Pt100 0-160 °C 8) 5s high 40002 8) 10
LS103A Fuel oil leakage, injection pipes NC-switch 0-1 1 5s equal 10004 1
Lub. oil
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

PT201 Lub. oil pressure, inlet X 4-20 mA 0-10 bar 3 5s 2,5 5s low 40011 10011 12011 100
TE201 Lub. oil temp., inlet Pt100 0-160 °C 75 5s 80 5s high 40012 10012 12012 10
LS204 Lub. oil level, wet sump NC-switch 0-1 1 20 s equal 10013 1
PDY243 Lub. oil filter differential pressure calculated 0 - 2 bar 1,0 5s high 40014 10014 100
PT271 Lub. oil pressure at turbocharger X 4-20 mA 0-10 bar 1,3 10 s low 40015 10015 100
TE272 Lub. oil temp. at turbo charger outlet Pt100 0-160 °C 120 10 s high 40016 10016 10
PT241 Lube oil pressure, filter inlet 4-20 mA 0-10 bar 40018 100
PT291A Ctrl oil press, aft. VIC valve A-bank X 4-20 mA 0-10 bar 4) 0,8 5s 3) 0,8 1s 10019 12019 1
Starting air
PT301 Starting air pressure 4-20 mA 0-16 bar 7 15 s low 40022 10022 100
PT311 Control air pressure 4-20 mA 0-40 bar 16 5s low 40023 10023 100
PT301 Starting air pressure 4-20 mA 0-16 bar 15 5s high 10025 100
Cooling water
PT401 HT-water pressure, inlet X 4-20 mA 0-6 bar 5) 2,0 5s 6) 1,6 5s low 40027 10027 12027 100
TE401 HT-water temp., inlet X Pt100 0-160 °C 60 5s low 40028 10028 10
TE402 HT-water temp., outlet X Pt100 0-160 °C 105 5s high 40029 10029 10
PT471 LT-water pressure, inlet X 4-20 mA 0-6 bar 5) 2,0 5s low 40031 10031 100
TE471 LT-water temp., inlet Pt100 0-160 °C 55 30 s high 40032 10032 10
TE482 LT Water temperature, LOC outlet Pt100 0-160 °C 40033 10
TEZ402-1 HT water temp, outlet X Pt100 0-160 °C 108 5s high 40035 12035 10
Exhaust gas
TE511 Exhaust gas temp. TC inlet 1 NiCr/Ni 0-750 °C 620 10 s 640 20 s high 40038 10038 12038 10
TE517 Exhaust gas temp. TC outlet NiCr/Ni 0-750 °C 450 30 s high 40039 10039 10
TE5011A Exhaust gas temp. cylinder 1 X NiCr/Ni 0-750 °C 510 10 s 530 10 s high 40040 10040 12040 10
TY500 Exhaust gas temperature average calculated 0-750 °C 40049 10
TY5017A Exhaust gas temp. deviation 01A X calculated -200/+200 °C ±90/50 10 s ±110/60 20 s high 40050 10050 12050 10
10-25
10-26

Charge air
PT601 Charge air pressure, inlet 4-20 mA 0-6 bar 3,8 5s 3,9 5s high 40062 10062 12062 100
TE601 Charge air temperature, inlet Pt100 0-160 °C 70 5s 75 5s high 40063 10063 12063 10
TE601 Charge air temperature, inlet X Pt100 0-160 °C 25 5s low 10064 10
Miscellaneous
NS8100 CAN failure in system SW-function 0-1 1 3s equal 10087 1
GS792 Turning gear position X NC-switch 0-1 1 0,1 s equal 10089 1
GS171 Stop lever in stop position NO-switch 0-1 1 0,1 s equal 11090 1
GT165-2 Fuel rack position 4-20 mA 0-50 mm 40091 10
SE518 Turbo charger speed X Mg 0-1000Hz 0-75000 rpm 46827 5s 47300 0,1 s high 40092 10092 12092 0.1
KY870 Modbus counter calculated 1-1000 40094 1
STY196 Engine speed 0-1200 rpm 40095 1
ST196P Engine speed sensor failure primary X 0-1 1 3s equal 10096 1
ST196S Engine speed sensor failure secondary X 0-1 1 3s equal 10097 1
WY196-2 Torsional vibration level, peak X calculated 0-2 deg 0,35 10 s high 40098 10098 100 a
GTY1624 Engine load, relative BMEP X SW-function -10-120 % 102 10 s 105 10 s high 10099 12099 10
NS803 Control system high temperature calculated 0-1 1 0s high 10100 1
Engine status
IS872 2) Engine ready for start SW-function 0-1 1 equal 10105 1
IS880 2) Engine start block active SW-function 0-1 1 equal 10106 1
IB724 2) Local control mode NO-switch 0-1 1 equal 10107 1
IS875 Start failure SW-function 0-1 1 0s equal 10108 1
OS7315 2) Load reduction request SW-function 0-1 1 equal 10109 1
IS7602 2) Stop/shutdown NO-switch 0-1 1 0s equal 10110 1
IS7306 2) Stop/shutdown override NO-switch 0-1 1 equal 10111 1
OS7343 2) Engine blow NO-switch 0-1 1 equal 10113 1
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Status of start blockings
PT201 2) Lub. oil pressure, inlet 4-20 mA 0-10 bar 0,3 0s low 10116 100
GS792 2) Turning gear engaged NC-switch 0-1 1 0s equal 10117 1
GS171 2) Stop lever in stop position NO-switch 0-1 1 0s equal 10118 1
OS7344 2) Local selector in blocked position NO-switch 0-1 1 0s equal 10119 1
OS7312 2) Ext Sb1 Clutch engaged NO-switch 0-1 1 0s equal 10121 1
IS7311 2) IS7311 start blocking NO-switch 0-1 1 0s equal 10126 1
Status of shutdowns
STY196 Engine speed sensor failure emergency X 0-1 1 0,1 s 1 0,1 s equal 10127 11127 1
IS4011 HT water temp shutdown status NO-switch 0-1 1) 1 0,1 s 1 (>110°C) 0,1 s equal 10128 11128 1
IS1741/IS1742 Overspeed shutdown status from ESM NO-switch 0-1 1 (>115%) 7) 0,1 s equal 11129 1
IS2011 LO press shutdown status NO-switch 0-1 1) 1 0,1 s 1 (<2 bar) 0,1 s equal 10130 11130 1
IS7311 Ext Sd3 Red gear lub oil press low NO-switch 0-1 1) 1 0,1 s 1 0,1 s equal 10136 11136 1
IS7305 Ext Sd 4 from Emg. Stop PB NO-switch 0-1 1 7) 0,1 s equal 11137 1
NY1604 Engine speed low, run mode switch 0-1 1 1s active 11140 1
Others
NS869 WIP failure SW-function 0-1 1 3s equal 10141 1
NS718 ESM failure SW-function 0-1 1 0,1 s equal 10145 1
NS7799-1 PDM System supply earth fault SW-function 0-1 1 0,1 s equal 10148 1
NS7800-1 PDM System supply failure SW-function 0-1 1 0,1 s equal 10149 1
NB7801 System control supply failure SW-function 0-1 1 0,1 s equal 10150 1
10-27
10-28

Notes:
1) Shutdown prewarning
2) Status information, not to be treated as an alarm Exhaust gas temp. deviation diagram (TY50*7A)
3) Sp load reduction -> PT291A oil pressure over 0,8 bar and CV381 = OFF
Delay 10 s after CV381 status change
4) PT291A oil pressure below 0.8 bar AND CV381 = ON 150 245 250 500 600
5) Variable set point: 2 bar at nominal speed, 1 bar at 50% speed and below. 130 LR low -150 -110 -60 -60
Linear between speeds 50% to 100%. Assumed static pressure 1 bar. LR high 150 110 60 60
110
6) Variable set point: 1,6 bar at nominal speed, 1 bar at 50% speed and below. Alarm low -150 -90 -50 -50
Linear between speeds 50% to 100%. Assumed static pressure 1 bar. 90 Alarm high 150 90 50 50
7) Shutdown is actuated without shutdown pre-warning (not overridable). 70 Low -150 150 250 250
8) TE101 low and high temp alarms to be generated in alarm system 50
High -150 150 500 500
LR low A2 -150 -120 -90 -90
30 LR high A2 150 120 90 90
500 ºC
10 Alarm low A -150 -100
250 ºC -70 -70
Alarm high 150 100 70 70
-10 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
-30
Temp. deviation [ºC]

-50
-70
-90 Alarm
-110 Load Reduction
-130 Limit low
-150
Average exh. gas temp. [ºC]
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DBAE705679 a - Power unit
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-29

10-30 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-31

10-32 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-33

10-34 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DBAE705681 - - Bridge control panel
.
INDICATION LAMPS:
PUSH-BUTTONS:
/
.
INDICATORS:
MISC.:
U1:
H1:
H2:
H3:
H4:
S1:
S2:
S3:
S4:
S5:
S6:
P1:
I1:
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-35

10-36 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-37

DBAE705683 - - Wing control panel
.
1
10-38 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DBAE705683 - - Wing control panel
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-39

DAAF025194 - - Indicator Box
10-40 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

DAAF025194 - - Indicator Box
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-41

DBAE705685 a - Prelube pump starter
10-42 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-43

10-44 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-45

DBAE705687 b - MDF Circulating pump starter
Пускатель циркуляционного насоса MDF
Главный выключатель
Насос работает
Неисправность
питание
сброс
10-46 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-47

10-48 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 10-49

Installation Planning Instructions 11. ANNEX
11. ANNEX
11.1 Unit conversion tables

The tables below will help you to convert units used in this product guide to other units. Where
the conversion factor is not accurate a suitable number of decimals have been used.
Table 11-1 Length conversion factors Table 11-2 Mass conversion factors
Convert from To Multiply by Convert from To Multiply by
mm in 0.0394 kg lb 2.205
mm ft 0.00328 kg oz 35.274
Table 11-3 Pressure conversion factors Table 11-4 Volume conversion factors
kPa psi (lbf/in2) 0.145 m3 in3 61023.744
kPa lbf/ft2 20.885 m3 ft3 35.315
kPa inch H2O 4.015 m3 Imperial gallon 219.969
kPa foot H2O 0.335 m3 US gallon 264.172
kPa mm H2O 101.972 m3 l (litre) 1000
kPa bar 0.01
Table 11-5 Power conversion factors Table 11-6 Moment of inertia and torque conver-
sion factors
Convert from To Multiply by
Convert from To Multiply by
kW hp (metric) 1.360
kgm2 lbft2 23.730
kW US hp 1.341
kNm lbf ft 737.562
Table 11-7 Fuel consumption conversion factors Table 11-8 Flow conversion factors
g/kWh g/hph 0.736 m3/h (liquid) US gallon/min 4.403
g/kWh lb/hph 0.00162 m3/h (gas) ft3/min 0.586
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 11-1

11. ANNEX Installation Planning Instructions
Table 11-9 Temperature conversion factors Table 11-10 Density conversion factors
Convert from To Calculate Convert from To Multiply by
°C F F = 9/5 *C + 32 kg/m3 lb/US gallon 0.00834
°C K K = C + 273.15 kg/m3 lb/Imperial gallon 0.01002
kg/m3 lb/ft3 0.0624
11.1.1 Prefix
Table 11-11 The most common prefix multipliers
Name Symbol Factor
tera T 1012
giga G 109
mega M 106
kilo k 103
milli m 10-3
micro μ 10-6
nano n 10-9
11.2 Abbreviations
NOTE
The abbreviation list below are common abbreviations used in Wärstilä Coorporation
documentation.
Not all abbreviations listed here will be found in your document.
Abbreviations Explanations
ABB ASEA Brown Boveri
ABP Air By-Pass ventilation
AC Aftercooler
ASD Anti-surge device
AWG Air Wastegate
BDC Bottom Dead Centre
BFO Bunker fuel oil
BN Base Number
11-2 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

BMEP Break Mean Effective Pressure
BSEC Brake Specific Energy Consumption
BWT Ballast Water Treatment
CAC Charge Air Cooler
CASS Combustion Air Saturation System
CBF Common base frame
CBM Condition Based Operation and Maintenance
CCAI Calculated Carbon Aromaticity Index
CCW Counter Clockwise rotating
CD Compressor drive
CPP Controllable pitch propeller
CR Common Rail
CRO Crude Oil
CS Constant speed
CSR Continuos Service Rating
cSt centi-Stoke (kinematic viscosity)
CW Clockwise rotating
DDS Document Delivery Schedule
DE Driving End or Diesel Electric
DF Dual-Fuel
DWI Direct Water Injection
EAS Extension Alarm System
ECA Emission Control Area
ECR Engine Control Room
EIAPP Engine International Air Pollution Prevention
ESD Emergency Shutdown
EWG Exhaust Gas Wastegate
FCV Flow Control Valve
FE Free End
FO Fuel Oil
FPP Fixed Pitch Propeller
FTC Field Termination Cabinet
FWE Flywheel End
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 11-3

GD Gas Diesel
GVU Gas valve unit
GW Glycol water
HAM Humid Air Motor
HC Hot Combustion
HFO Heavy Fuel Oil
HMI Human Machine Interface
HT High Temperature
HP High Pressure
IC Intercooler
IHM Inventory of Hazardous Material
IM Installation Manual
IMO International Maritime Organisation
I/O Input/Output
IPI Installation Planning Insructions
ISO International Standard Organisation
LBF Liquid Bio Fuel
LCP Local Control Panel
LD Location Driving end (turbocharger)
LF Location Free end (turbocharger)
LFO Light Fuel Oil
LI Level Indicator
LN Low Nox
LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
LO Lubricating Oil
LOC Lubricating Oil Cooler
LOM Lubricating Oil Module
LP Low Pressure
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
LT Low Temperature
NA Napier turbocharger
NECA NOx Emission Control Area
11-4 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

NG Natural Gas
M Maximum allowable relief valve setting
MARVS
MCR Maximum Continuous Rating
MDF Marine Diesel Fuel
MDO Marine Diesel Oil
MGE Main gas evaporator
MGO Marine Gas Oil
MN Methane Number
ORI Orimulsion
Pa Pascal
PBE Pressure build-up evaporator
PG Product Guide
PI Pressure Indicator
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PM Performance Maual
PMS Power Management System
POPRV Pilot operated pressure relief valve
ppm parts per million
PRV Pressure relief valve
PTI Power take-in
PTO Power take-off
RO Reverse Osmosis
S SOx Emission Control Area
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction
SD System Description
SECA
SFOC Specific Fuel Oil Consumption
SG Spark-ignited Gas
SLOC Specific Lubricating Oil Consumption
SOI Start of Injection
SPEX Single Pipe Exhaust System
SSV Start-up and Safety Valve
STID Steam Injection
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 11-5

TBO Time Between Overhauls
TC Turbocharger
TCS Tank connection space
TDC Top Dead Centre
TI Temperature Indicator
TP Twin Pump
TRV Thermal relief valve
TS Two-Stage turbocharging
TVC Torsional Vibration Calculation
UNIC Wärtsilä Unified Controls
VEC Variable Exhaust valve Closing
VIC Variable Inlet valve Closing
VIT Variable Injection Timing
VS Variable Speed
VTG Variable Turbine Geometry
WISE Wärtsilä Integrated Automation System
WOIS Wärstilä Operator's Interfaace System.
11.3 Collection of drawing symbols used in drawings

Table 11-12 List of symbols (DAAE000806c)
Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name
Valve, general valve Flow meter Local Instrument
Manually operated
Viscosimeter Local panel
valve
Non-return valve
Receiver, pulse Signal to control
(Flow from left to
damper board
right)
11-6 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Spring-loaded
Temperature indic-
overflow valve, Flame arrester
ator
straight, angle
Spring-loaded
Temperature
safety shut-off Flexible hose
sensor
valve
Pressure control
Temperature
valve Insulted pipe
sensor shutdown
(Spring loaded)
Pressure control
valve Insulated and
Pressure indicator
(Remote pressure heated pipe
sensing)
Pneumatically actu-
ated valve
Deaerator Pressure switch
(Diaphragm actuat-
or)
Self-operating re-
Solenoid actuated lease valve Pressure transmit-
valve (for example steam ter
trap or air vent)
Pneumatically actu-
Electrically driven Pressure switch
ated valve
compressor shutdown
(Cylinder actuator)
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 11-7

Pneumatically actu-
Differential pres-
ated valve Settling com-
sure indicator and
(Spring loaded cylin- pressor
alarm
der actuator)
Three-way valve Tank Level switch
Self contained ther-

Tank with heating Flow switch
mostatic valve
Three-way valve
with electric motor Orifice Temperture switch
actuator
Adjustable restrict-
Quick-closing valve
or
Three-way valve
with double-acting Quick-coupling
actuator
Electrically driven Automatic filter

pump with bypass filter
Turbochager Heat exchanger
Separator (Centri-
Filter
fuge)
11-8 Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Strainer Centrifugal filter
Automatic filter
Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 11-9

Wärtsilä is a global leader in complete lifecycle power solutions for the marine and energy markets. By
emphasising technological innovation and total efficiency, Wärtsilä maximises the environmental and
economic performance of the vessels and power plants of its customers. Wärtsilä is listed on the
NASDAQ OMX Helsinki, Finland.
See also www.wartsila.com
WÄRTSILÄ® is a registered trademark. © Wärtsilä Corporation.
Wärtsilä Finland Oy
Switchboard +358 10 709 0000
Fax +358 6 356 7188
www.wartsila.com

Ipi 6L20 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ipi 6L20 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Planning Instructions

Date of issue 9 May 2018

Installation Krasnoe 04001

Wärtsilä, Marine Solutions

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 iii

List of updated drawings in this version

iv Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

2. Main Engine ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 v

3. Fuel Oil System .................................................................................................................................. 3-1

4. Lubricating Oil and Crankcase Ventilation Systems ...................................................................... 4-1

vi Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

4.3.1.2 Renovating oil tank (2T04) .............................................................................. 4-7

5. Compressed Air System .................................................................................................................... 5-1

6. Cooling Water System ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

7. Combustion Air System ..................................................................................................................... 7-1

8. Exhaust Gas System .......................................................................................................................... 8-1

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 vii

8.2.5 Exhaust gas bellows (5H01) .......................................................................................... 8-3

9. Piping Arrangements ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

10. Automation System ........................................................................................................................... 10-1

viii Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

10.2.1.13 NS 885 Common engine alarm ....................................................................... 10-5

11. ANNEX ................................................................................................................................................. 11-1

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 ix

11.3 Collection of drawing symbols used in drawings ...................................................................... 11-6

x Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 xi

6-4 Minimum diameter of balance pipe ........................................................................................... 6-5

xii Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 xiii

xiv Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 xv

1.1 Project administration

Wärtsilä project name: Krasnoe 04001

Wärtsilä project organisation:

Project manager Leif Rönn

Project engineer: Jonas Skoglund

Mechanical design engineer: to be added by PE

Electrical design engineer: Anders Bäckström

Field service manager: to be added by PE

1.2 Project technical data

Maximum ambient air temperature 45 °C

Minimum inlet air temperature to engine 15 °C

Maximum LT cooling water temperature before 38 °C

1.2.2 Fuel oil specification

Table 1-1 ISO-F-RMG 700

Property Limit Unit

Density at 15°C, max. 991 kg/m3

Viscosity at 50°C, max. 700 cSt

Flash point, min 60 °C

Pour point (upper):

Krasnoe 04001 - a5 - 9 May 2018 1-1

Property Limit Unit

Carbon residue, micro method, max. 18 % mass

Ash, max. 0.1 % mass

Water, max. 0.5 % mass

Sulphur, max. Statutory % mass

Total sediment aged. max. 0.1 % mass

Aluminium + silicon, max. 60 mg/kg

1.2.4 Electric power supply

Main voltage (V) ............................ 3 x 400

Frequency (Hz) .............................. 50